Post on 31-May-2020
WAKULLA COUNTY
OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY (WWTF) INTERIM PROJECT
SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARED BY:
BASKERVILLE-DONOVAN, INC.
449 WEST MAIN STREET
PENSACOLA, FLORIDA 32502
BDI# 111803.10
ENGINEERING BUSINESS NO. EB-0000340
PREPARED FOR:
WAKULLA COUNTY
BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS
3093 CRAWFORDVILLE HWY.
CRAWFORDVILLE, FL 32326
May, 2020
RELEASED FOR BID
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR
OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY (WWTF) INTERIM
Division Section Title Pages
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
01 - EJCDC C-111 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 2
02 - EJCDC C-200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 10
03 - EJCDC C-451 QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT 12
04 - EJDCD C-410 BID FORM 16
05 - EJCDC C-430 BID BOND 2
06 - EJCDC C-510 NOTICE OF AWARD 2
07 - EJCDC C-520 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND
CONTRACTOR
8
08 - EJCDC C-700 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 70
09 - EJCDC C-800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 14
10 - EJCDC C-610 PERFORMANCE BOND 4
11 - EJCDC C-615 PAYMENT BOND 4
12 - EJCDC C-620 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 4
13 - EJCDC C-941 CHANGE ORDER 2
14 - EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2
15 - EJCDC C-625 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 2
16 - EJCDC RD-400 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT 2
17 - EJCDC AD-1048 CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT 2
18 - EJCDC 1940-Q CERTIFICATION FOR CONTRACTS, GRANTS AND
LOANS
2
19 - EJCDC 1780-28 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN 2
20 - EJCDC 1780-26 Exhibit GC-A CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S
ATTORNEY
2
21 - EJCDC 1780-26 Exhibit GC-B ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATION OF
FINAL PLANS & SPECIFICATONS
2
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 SUMMARY 4
01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 4
01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6
01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 12
01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 8
01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4
01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 4
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 2
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 12
01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 10
01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 8
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 8
01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 6
01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 6
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 8
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 6
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT APPLICABLE
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 96 36 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER
FACILITIES
12
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 3
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 15 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 16 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 17 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 18 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 19 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 20 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
NOT APPLICABLE
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 24 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 10
26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 6
26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 12
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6
26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6
26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12
26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6
26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12
26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 6
26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 10
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 4
26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 4
26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 10
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 29 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup
DIVISION 30 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 6
31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 14
31 23 16 EXCAVATION 4
31 23 17 TRENCHING 6
31 23 20 DEWATERING 6
31 23 23 FILL 4
31 25 01 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 8
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 4
32 17 14 WHEEL STOPS 2
32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 2
32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 6
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 32 13 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6
33 32 14 PUMP CONTROL PANELS, ENCLOSURES 4
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 36 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 5
DIVISION 37 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 38 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 39 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
Process Equipment Subgroup
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS
40 05 13.54 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 10
40 05 13.55 POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 6
40 05 23.15 GATE VALVES 4
40 05 23.21 PLUG VALVES 4
40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCES PIPING 6
40 05 63.01 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 4
40 90 00 SYSTEM INTEGRATION 14
40 91 23 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 6
40 94 50 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTION 10
40 95 13 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 16
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE
EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 4
46 21 83 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 8
Process Equipment Subgroup
DIVISION 47 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 6
DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 49 - RESERVED
NOT APPLICABLE
APPENDICIES
APPENDIX A CSI SUBSTITUTION FORM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
EJCDC® C-111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1
WAKULLA COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS
CRAWFORDVILLE, FLORIDA
OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT INTERIM PROJECT RE-BID
ITB 2020-16
PROJECT NUMBER 111803.10
ADVERTISEMENT FOR RE-BID
Sealed Bids for the construction of the Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project Re-
Bid, ITB 2020-16, Project Number 111803.10 will be received by Wakulla County BOCC, at the office of
the Wakulla County BOCC, until 3:00 p.m. Eastern Time on June 29, 2020 at which time the Bids
received will be publicly opened and read aloud. The Project consists of constructing an in-plant pump
station, septage receiving auger screen unit, valve actuators, filter bypass piping, miscellaneous piping,
instrumentation, electrical improvements and all appurtenances necessary for a complete and
operational system.
The Issuing Office for the Bidding Documents is: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc., 449 West Main Street,
Pensacola, Florida 32502, Richard Delp, Project Manager, 850-438-9661. Prospective Bidders may
examine the Bidding Documents at the Issuing Office on Mondays through Fridays between the hours of
8:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., central time, and may obtain copies of the Bidding Documents from the Issuing
Office as described below.
Bidding Documents also may be examined at Wakulla County BOCC, 3093 Crawfordville Highway,
Crawfordville, Florida 32327 and Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) 1538 Metropolitan
Blvd., Suite A2, Tallahassee, Florida, on Mondays through Fridays between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and
4:00 p.m., eastern time. With 48 hour advance notice, a specific time during 9:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. can
be arranged to view the plans at the office of Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. 2420 Lakeshore Drive, Suite 200,
Tallahassee, Florida. Please contact Alan Hart at (850) 712-3956 to make arrangements.
Electronic copies of the Bidding Documents in pdf format on compact disc may be obtained from the
Issuing Office, during the hours indicated above, upon payment of a deposit of $50.00 (non-refundable)
for each set. Checks for Bidding Documents shall be payable to Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Upon request
and receipt of the document deposit indicated above, the Issuing Office will transmit the Bidding
Documents via drop box or FTP site. The date that the Bidding Documents are transmitted by the
Issuing Office will be considered the Bidder’s date of receipt of the Bidding Documents. Partial sets of
Bidding Documents will not be available from the Issuing Office. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be
responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including Addenda if any, obtained from
sources other than the Issuing Office.
EJCDC® C-111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2
All inquiries and clarification requests shall be submitted in writing to Baskerville-Donovan, Inc.
attention Richard Delp, Project Manager, 850-438-9661, by 2:00pm, central time, June 15, 2020
Inquiries received after this date will not be accepted. Verbal clarifications will not be provided.
A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for a public
entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may
not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or
public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to a public entity, may not be awarded or
perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public
entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided
in Section 287.017, Florida Statutes, for CATEGORY TWO ($35,000) for a period of 36 months from the
date of being placed on the convicted vendor list.
Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of at least 90 days from date of opening. Complete insurance
coverage will be required from the successful bidder prior to signing the contract.
The Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners reserves the right to waive informalities in any bid;
reject any or all proposals, in whole or in part; re-bid a project, in whole or in part; and to accept a
proposal that in its judgment is the lowest and best bid of a responsible bidder. In accepting a bid,
Wakulla County may award a contract based only on the base bid, the base bid plus all alternates, or the
base bid plus any alternates which Wakulla County selects -- with all decisions being made based upon
what Wakulla County believes to be the best interests of its ratepayers, in the reasonable exercise of its
discretion. Wakulla County further reserves the right to increase or decrease quantities as may be
required to meet the needs of Wakulla County, at the unit price which was bid.
Wakulla County does not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, religion, age,
marital status and disability/handicapped status in employment or provision of service.
Bid proposal must be clearly marked on the envelope:
WAKULLA COUNTY ITB: #2020-16
BID: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
INTERIM PROJECT RE-BID
BDI PROJECT NO: 111803.10
A mandatory pre-bid conference followed by a mandatory site visit will be held at 10:00 a.m., Eastern
Time on June 8, 2020. In order to accommodate current meeting restrictions and social distancing
requirements, the meeting will be held outdoors at 2146 Lawhon Mill Road Crawfordville, FL 32327,
rain or shine. Please be prepared as this meeting will not be cancelled due to inclement weather.
Bid security shall be furnished in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.
Owner: Wakulla County
By: David Edwards
Title: County Administrator
Date: May 28, 2020
+ + END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS + +
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................... 1
ARTICLE 2 – Copies of Bidding Documents ................................................................................................... 1
ARTICLE 3 – Qualifications of Bidders ........................................................................................................... 1
ARTICLE 4 – Site and Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination of Site; Owner’s Safety Program;
Other Work at the Site .................................................................................................................................. 1
ARTICLE 5 – Bidder’s Representations .......................................................................................................... 3
ARTICLE 6 – Pre-Bid Conference ................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 7 – Interpretations and Addenda .................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 8 – Bid Security ............................................................................................................................... 5
ARTICLE 9 – Contract Times .......................................................................................................................... 5
ARTICLE 10 – Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................................ 5
ARTICLE 11 – Substitute and “Or-Equal” Items............................................................................................. 5
ARTICLE 12 – Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ................................................................................... 6
ARTICLE 13 – Preparation of Bid ................................................................................................................... 6
ARTICLE 14 – Basis of Bid .............................................................................................................................. 7
ARTICLE 15 – Submittal of Bid ....................................................................................................................... 7
ARTICLE 16 – Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ....................................................................................... 7
ARTICLE 17 – Opening of Bids ....................................................................................................................... 8
ARTICLE 18 – Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ................................................................................... 8
ARTICLE 19 – Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract .............................................................................. 8
ARTICLE 20 – Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................... 9
ARTICLE 21 – Signing of Agreement .............................................................................................................. 9
ARTICLE 22 – WAGE RATES REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 9
ARTICLE 23 – FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 9
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS
1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to
Bidders have the meanings indicated below:
A. Issuing Office – The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued.
ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office in the number
and format stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid.
2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor
Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do
so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license
for any other use.
ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, Bidder shall submit with its Bid (a)
written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and
present commitments, and (b) the following additional information:
A. Evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located.
B. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.
C. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information; coordinate with provisions of Article
12 of these Instructions, “Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.”
D. Complete and submit the Qualifications Statement, EJCDC C-451, included in the contract
documents.
3.02 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek
additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications.
3.03 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s
representations and certifications.
ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S
SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
4.01 Site and Other Areas
A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-
way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any
additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or
storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are
to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.
4.02 Existing Site Conditions
A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2
1. The Supplementary Conditions identify:
a. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at or adjacent to the Site.
b. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface
or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
c. reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental
Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.
d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any
Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract
Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is
entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and
established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any
interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data,
interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings.
3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition
of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply.
4. Geotechnical Baseline Report: The Bidding Documents contain a Geotechnical Baseline
Report (GBR). The GBR describes certain select subsurface conditions that are
anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations
(“Baseline Conditions”). The GBR is a Contract Document.
The Baseline Conditions in the GBR are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree
of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the Baseline
Conditions. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an
independent review and analysis of the GBR, all other Contract Documents, Technical
Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential
subsurface conditions are baselined.
Nothing in the GBR is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their
own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices,
nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions
and programs incident thereto.
B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents
with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site are set forth in
the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and
Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.
C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished
to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and
Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or
unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05
of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data
furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at
the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous
Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3
indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be
within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.
4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders
A. Bidder shall conduct the required Site visit immediately following the mandatory pre-bid
conference, and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site.
B. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting,
the Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and
submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing
so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints
on Owner’s authority regarding the Site.
C. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and
location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established
by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to
schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety
programs.
D. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.
4.04 Owner’s Safety Program
A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. As the
General Conditions indicate, if an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the
Supplementary Conditions.
4.05 Other Work at the Site
A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the
general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at
the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to
the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written
contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to
examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential
matters), if any.
ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS
5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:
A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items
identified in the Bidding Documents;
B. visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas,
and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that
may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost,
progress, and performance of the Work;
D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4
Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2)
reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent
to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with
respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings;
E. consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to
contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations
obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and
drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such
information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of
the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction
to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs;
F. agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,
that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the
Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other
terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;
G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at
the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;
H. promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies
that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution
thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder;
I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work;
and
J. agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by
Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without
exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the
Work required by the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 6 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE
6.01 A mandatory pre-Bid conference and site visit will be held at the time and location stated in the
invitation or advertisement to bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to
discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference.
Engineer will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers
necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied
upon and will not be binding or legally effective.
ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to
Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in
response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded as having
received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for
opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding.
Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents.
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5
ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY
8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent
of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the
form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid bond (on the form included in the Bidding
Documents) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 6.01 and 6.02 of the
General Conditions.
8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the
contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the
required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the
Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract
Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award,
Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of
that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder
defaults.
8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving
the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of
the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders
will be released.
8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving
the award will be released within seven days after the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES
9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which the Work is to be substantially
completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 10 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial
Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the
Agreement.
ARTICLE 11 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS
11.01 The Contract for the Work, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment
specified or described in the Bidding Documents, and those “or-equal” or substitute materials
and equipment subsequently approved by Engineer prior to the submittal of Bids and
identified by Addendum. No item of material or equipment will be considered by Engineer as
an “or-equal” or substitute unless written request for approval has been submitted by Bidder
and has been received by Engineer at least 15 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids in the
case of a proposed substitute and 5 days prior in the case of a proposed “or-equal.” Each such
request shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.04 and 7.05 of the General
Conditions. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s
decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed item will be final. If Engineer approves any
such proposed item, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective
Bidders. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.
11.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the
Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6
Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-
Bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.
11.03 If an award is made, Contractor shall be allowed to submit proposed substitutes and “or-
equals” in accordance with the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 12 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
12.01 If required by the bid documents, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall within five days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors
or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work: All major process equipment.
If requested by Owner, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with
pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each
such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If Owner or Engineer, after due
investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or
entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to
submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit a
substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost
occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating
Bids and making the Contract award.
12.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the
Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, or
other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds
for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity
so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of
the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent
revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions.
12.03 Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity
against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
12.04 The Contractor shall not award work to Subcontractor(s) in excess of the limits stated in SC
7.06.
ARTICLE 13 – PREPARATION OF BID
13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.
A. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink.
Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid
price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item,
and unit price item listed therein.
B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is
optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then
Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.”
13.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose
title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The
corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown.
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7
13.03 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member or
other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of
formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown.
13.04 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address.
13.05 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer
in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be
shown.
13.06 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures.
13.07 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall
be filled in on the Bid Form.
13.08 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall
be shown.
13.09 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state
where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and
qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state
contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form.
ARTICLE 14 – BASIS OF BID
14.01 Lump Sum/Unit Price
A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum/unit price basis as set forth in the Bid Form.
ARTICLE 15 – SUBMITTAL OF BID
15.01 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is furnished one separate unbound copy of
the Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be
completed and submitted with the Bid security and the other documents required to be
submitted under the terms of Article 7 of the Bid Form.
15.02 A Bid shall be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in
the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with
the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is
submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and
other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope
containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with
the notation “BID ENCLOSED, ITB 2015-05.” A mailed Bid shall be addressed to Wakulla County
Board of County Commissioners, 3093 Crawfordville Hwy., Crawfordville, FL 32327.
15.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the
correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the
Bidder unopened.
ARTICLE 16 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID
16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a
Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the
date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be
returned to the Bidder.
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8
16.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in
the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the
opening of Bids.
16.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner
and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a
material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid,
and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be
disqualified from further bidding on the Work.
ARTICLE 17 – OPENING OF BIDS
17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and,
unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base
Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.
ARTICLE 18 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but
Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of
this period.
ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT
19.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming,
nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that
Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports
to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents,
or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the
Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that Owner also reserves the right to waive
all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.
19.02 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder
submitting the lowest responsive Bid.
19.03 Evaluation of Bids
A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed
requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the
Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
B. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted, Bids
will be compared on the basis of the total of the products of the estimated quantity of each
item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items.
19.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the
Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers
proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers
must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.
19.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the
responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or
Suppliers.
EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9
ARTICLE 20 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
20.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets
forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the
Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to Owner, it shall be
accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.
ARTICLE 21 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
21.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the
unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as
identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall execute and
deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any bonds and insurance
documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents) to Owner. Within ten days
thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful
Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in
Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 22 – WAGE RATES REQUIREMENTS
22.01 If the contract price is in excess of $100,000, provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act of 29 CFR 5.5(b) apply.
ARTICLE 23 – FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS
23.01 Federal requirements at Article 19 of the Supplementary Conditions apply to this Contract.
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 6
QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT
THE INFORMATION SUPPLIED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS CONFIDENTIAL TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS
1. SUBMITTED BY:
Official Name of Firm:
Address:
2. SUBMITTED TO:
3. SUBMITTED FOR:
Owner:
Project Name:
TYPE OF WORK:
4. CONTRACTOR'S CONTACT INFORMATION
Contact Person:
Title:
Phone:
Email:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 6
5. AFFILIATED COMPANIES:
Name:
Address:
6. TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:
SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP
Name of Owner:
Doing Business As:
Date of Organization:
PARTNERSHIP
Date of Organization:
Type of Partnership:
Name of General Partner(s):
CORPORATION
State of Organization:
Date of Organization:
Executive Officers:
- President:
- Vice President(s):
- Treasurer:
- Secretary:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 6
LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY
State of Organization:
Date of Organization:
Members:
JOINT VENTURE
Sate of Organization:
Date of Organization:
Form of Organization:
Joint Venture Managing Partner
- Name:
- Address:
Joint Venture Managing Partner
- Name:
- Address:
Joint Venture Managing Partner
- Name:
- Address:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 6
7. LICENSING
Jurisdiction:
Type of License:
License Number:
Jurisdiction:
Type of License:
License Number:
8. CERTIFICATIONS CERTIFIED BY:
Disadvantage Business Enterprise:
Minority Business Enterprise:
Woman Owned Enterprise:
Small Business Enterprise:
Other ( ):
9. BONDING INFORMATION
Bonding Company:
Address:
Bonding Agent:
Address:
Contact Name:
Phone:
Aggregate Bonding Capacity:
Available Bonding Capacity as of date of this submittal:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 5 of 6
10. CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE:
Current Experience:
List on Schedule A all uncompleted projects currently under contract (If Joint Venture list
each participant's projects separately).
Previous Experience:
List on Schedule B all projects completed within the last 5 Years (If Joint Venture list each
participant's projects separately).
Has firm listed in Section 1 ever failed to complete a construction contract awarded to it?
YES NO
If YES, attach as an Attachment details including Project Owner's contact information.
Has any Corporate Officer, Partner, Joint Venture participant or Proprietor ever failed to
complete a construction contract awarded to them in their name or when acting as a principal
of another entity?
YES NO
If YES, attach as an Attachment details including Project Owner's contact information.
Are there any judgments, claims, disputes or litigation pending or outstanding involving the firm
listed in Section 1 or any of its officers (or any of its partners if a partnership or any of the
individual entities if a joint venture)?
YES NO
If YES, attach as an Attachment details including Project Owner's contact information.
11. SAFETY PROGRAM:
Name of Contractor's Safety Officer:
Include the following as attachments:
Provide as an Attachment Contractor's (and Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and
Suppliers furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total
amount of the Bid) list of all safety citations or violations under any state all received within
the last 5 years (indicate disposition as applicable) - IF NONE SO STATE.
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 6 of 6
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED HEREWITH, INCLUDING ANY ATTACHMENTS, IS
TRUE TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF.
NAME OF ORGANIZATION:
BY:
TITLE:
DATED:
NOTARY ATTEST:
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME
THIS DAY OF , 20___
NOTARY PUBLIC - STATE OF
MY COMMISSION EXPIRES:
REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS
1. Schedule A (Current Experience).
2. Schedule B (Previous Experience).
3. List of proposed Subcontractors with a sum of work over $50,000.
4. List of proposed Vendors providing equipment over $50,000.
5. Evidence of authority for individuals listed in Section 7 to bind organization to an agreement.
7. Required safety program submittals listed in Section 13.
8. Additional items as pertinent.
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 3
SCHEDULE A CURRENT EXPERIENCE
Project Name Owner's Contact Person Design Engineer Contract Date Type of Work Status Cost of Work
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 3
SCHEDULE B
PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE (Include ALL Projects Completed within last 5 years)
Project Name Owner's Contact Person Design Engineer Contract Date Type of Work Status Cost of Work
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 3
SCHEDULE B PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE (Include ALL Projects Completed within last 5 years)
Project Name Owner's Contact Person Design Engineer Contract Date Type of Work Status Cost of Work
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Name:
Company:
Telephone:
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
BID FORM
WAKULLA COUNTY OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT INTERIM PROJECT RE-BID
PROJECT NO. 111803.10
FEBRUARY 2020
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 – Bid Recipient ................................................................................................................................ 1
Article 2 – Bidder’s Acknowledgements ....................................................................................................... 1
Article 3 – Bidder’s Representations ............................................................................................................. 1
Article 4 – Bidder’s Certification ................................................................................................................... 2
Article 5 – Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................... 3
Article 6 – Time of Completion ................................................................................................................... 13
Article 7 – Attachments to this Bid ............................................................................................................. 13
Article 8 – Defined Terms............................................................................................................................ 14
Article 9 – Bid Submittal.............................................................................................................................. 14
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1
ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT
1.01 This Bid is submitted to:
WAKULLA COUNTY
3093 CRAWFORDVILLE HWY.
CRAWFORDVILLE, FL 32327
1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement
with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or
indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and
in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without
limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to
acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may
agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS
3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:
A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, and any data and
reference items identified in the Bidding Documents, and hereby acknowledges receipt of
the following Addenda:
Addendum No. Addendum, Date
B. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and
adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfied itself as to the general, local, and
Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Bidder is familiar with and has satisfied itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect
cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and
drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if
any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.
E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly
known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and
observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and any Site-related
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2
reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of
such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance
of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs.
F. Bidder agrees, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding
paragraph, that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data
are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid
and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of
the Bidding Documents.
G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the
Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and confirms that the
written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.
I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all
terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work.
J. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without exception the
Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work
required by the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 4 – BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION
4.01 Bidder certifies that:
A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or
rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation;
B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false
or sham Bid;
C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and
D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing
for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of
value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at
artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and
open competition;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,
with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices
at artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “Coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or
affect the e execution of the Contract.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3
ARTICLE 5 – BASIS OF BID
5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following
price(s):
5.02 LUMP SUM
A. Where payment for items is shown to be paid for on a lump sum basis, no separate
payment will be made for any item of work required to complete the lump sum item. The
lump sum price bid for various items shall be compensation in full for furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals with these plans and specification. All disposal
costs shall be included in the bid items. Unless otherwise stated, measurement shall be
based upon the Engineer’s estimate of percent complete per partial payment period.
General/Civil
1. Bid Item 1 – General Provisions: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT for all work included
under this bid item will be made for mobilization and demobilization of all labor,
equipment, materials and appurtenances necessary for construction of the project.
Mobilization shall include all those operations necessary for the movement of
personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the initial project site, safety
equipment and first aid supplies, and sanitary and other facilities. Also included as part
of this bid item is the cost for project performance and payment bonds, insurance,
indemnifications, photographs, shop drawings, working drawings, schedules,
documents, coordination, and phasing and other miscellaneous items associated with
the work. Measurement for this bid item will be lump sum. The lump sum price for
general provisions will be limited to five percent (5%) of the contract amount. Seventy
percent (70%) of the lump sum price will be payable with the first month’s partial
payment. The remaining thirty (30%) will be payable with the final partial payment.
Valves
2. Bid Item 14 – Horizontal Swing Check Valve and Meter Vault: The LUMP SUM BID
AMOUNT for furnishing and installing the concrete valve vault will be compensation in
full for furnishing all material, labor, and equipment and incidentals necessary for
installing the vault in accordance with these specifications. The required material for
the valve vault is detailed in the drawings. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid
based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the Engineer.
Existing In-Plant Pump Station
3. Bid Item 17 – Existing In-Plant Pump Station Demolition and Modification: The LUMP
SUM BID AMOUNT will be a payment for all demolition and modification work
associated with the existing In-Plant Pump Station. Existing In-Plant Pump Station
Demolition work includes, but is not limited to, demolition, porting, plugging, and
debris disposal in compliance with the all existing regulations, of the existing In-Plant
Pump Station structure and other related items. The existing installed pumps shall be
turned over to Wakulla County, if desired. Existing In-Plant Pump Station Modification
work includes, but is not limited to, cleaning of existing wet well, coring holes for new
gravity sewer pipes, sealing existing force main holes and grouting of the wet well base
slab. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials,
equipment and disposal costs necessary to complete this work item. The Contractor
may apply for payment based on the percent completeness of the work.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4
Proposed In-Plant Pump Station
4. Bid Item 19 – Fiberglass Wet Well and Accessories: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will
be a payment for furnishing and installing the In-Plant Pump Station fiberglass wet
well in accordance with the contract documents. Payment shall include, but not be
limited to, excavation, shoring, compaction, bedding, grading, reinforcement, and
installation of fiberglass wet well, top slab, hatches, liner, restoration, and all other
items and incidentals required to construct a fully functional fiberglass wet well. The
LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed
as approved by the ENGINEER.
5. Bid Item 20 – In-Plant Pump Station Fittings, Valves, Meter, and Miscellaneous
Items: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be a payment for furnishing and installing
the In-Plant Pump Station’s fittings, valves, meters and miscellaneous items in
accordance with the contract documents. This includes, but is not limited to, all
fittings, valves, meters, pressure gauges, restraints, supports, flushing, and testing
from the submersible pumps to the stainless steel/DIP transition. The LUMP SUM BID
AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by
the ENGINEER.
6. Bid Item 21 – In-Plant Pump Station Concrete Pad: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will
be a payment for installing the concrete pad at the In-Plant Pump Station. Payment
shall include but not be limited to grading, compaction, bedding, forming,
reinforcement, and concrete pouring as required in accordance with the contract
documents. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be based on the percentages of work
completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
Headworks Screen Walkway and Railway Modification
7. Bid Item 22 – Screen Walkway and Railway Modification: The LUMP SUM BID
AMOUNT will be a payment for labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install
the proposed walkways and railways for the existing headworks. The walkway and
railways shall be provided by Kusters Water. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be
paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
Emergency Eye Wash Station
8. Bid Item 23 – Emergency Eye Wash Station Equipment, Piping, Fitting, and Valves:
The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be payment for furnishing and installing the
emergency eye wash station equipment, piping, fittings, valves, and miscellaneous
items in accordance with the contract documents. This includes, but is not limited to,
all piping, fittings, valves, restraints, supports, flushing, and testing from the existing 2”
potable water transition point to the emergency eye wash station drain/chlorine
contact chamber drain transition point. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid
based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
Filter Piping Modification
9. Bid Item 31 – 20-inch Core Drill with Double Stainless Steel Link Seal: The LUMP SUM
BID AMOUNT will be payment for all modification work associated with the existing
Chlorine Contact Chamber influent wet well. Modification work includes, but is not
limited to, means and methods to successfully core drill and install a double stainless
steel link seal. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials
and equipment necessary to complete this work item. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5
shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the
ENGINEER.
10. Bid Item 32 – Existing Filter Overflow Piping Demolition and Air Compressor
Relocation: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be payment for all demolition and
modification work associated with the existing Fluidyne Filter System. Existing Filter
System Demolition work includes, but is not limited to, demolition of the existing filter
overflow piping system, relocation of the existing air compressor system and installing
air piping necessary for an operational system in accordance with these contract
drawings. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials and
equipment necessary to complete this work item. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall
be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
Septage Receiving Station Modification
11. Bid Item 36 – Rock Trap, Septage Pit, Piping and Fittings Demolition: The LUMP SUM
BID AMOUNT will be payment for all demolition work associated with the existing
Rock Trap equipment, Septage Pit, piping and fittings. Existing Rock Trap Equipment
work includes, but is not limited to, equipment demolition, piping demolition, grout
filling, capping of pipes, and debris disposal in compliance with the all existing
regulations, of the existing Rock Trap equipment and other related items. The existing
Rock Trap Equipment shall be turned over to Wakulla County, if desired. The existing
Septage Pit work includes, but is not limited to, septage pit demolition, debris removal,
excavation and compaction. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all
labor, materials, equipment and disposal costs necessary to complete this work item.
The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work
completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
12. Bid Item 37 – Septage Receiving Screw Screen and Fittings: The LUMP SUM BID
AMOUNT will be payment for furnishing and installing the Septage Receiving Screw
Screen equipment, fittings, and miscellaneous items in accordance with the contract
documents. This includes, but is not limited to, all fittings, restraints, supports,
flushing, and testing from the existing EleMech System to the Septage Receiving Screw
Screen effluent pipe/existing In-Plant pump station connection point. The LUMP SUM
BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved
by the ENGINEER.
13. Bid Item 38 – Septage Receiving Reuse Water Piping Valves, Fittings and
Appurtenances: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be payment for furnishing and
installing the Septage Receiving reuse water piping, fittings, valves, and miscellaneous
items in accordance with the contract documents. This includes, but is not limited to,
all piping, fittings, valves, restraints, service saddle, supports, flushing, and testing
from the 6” reuse water transition point to the Septage Receiving Screw Screen
equipment. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of
work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
14. Bid Item 39 – Septage Receiving Concrete Pad: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be
payment for installing the concrete pad at the Septage Receiving Screw Screen.
Payment shall include but not be limited to grading, compaction, bedding, forming,
reinforcement, and concrete pouring as required in accordance with the contract
documents. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be based on the percentages of work
completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6
Project Site Electrical
15. Bid Item 40 – Electrical Instrumentation and Controls: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT
will be full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required for
installation of the electrical components as shown on the contract drawings. This
includes, but is not limited to, conduits, cables, conductors, panels and other
appurtenances to facilitate the operations of the identified equipment based on the
mode of operation. Payment will be made on a LUMP SUM basis, based on the
percentage of completion as approved by the Engineer.
Miscellaneous Items
16. Bid Item 42 – Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT
will be to cover the CONTRACTOR’s cost to comply with the requirements to prepare
and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan prior to commencement of
construction. The CONTRACTOR may apply for payment of the first partial payment
request contingent upon approval by the ENGINEER.
17. Bid Item 43 – Dewatering: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be compensation for all
labor, equipment, and materials including, but not limited to, surface pumps, sump
pumps, well points and header pipe, and trenching/digging machinery. The discharge
associated with dewatering requires a permit from FDEP and it is the CONCTRACTOR’s
responsibility to obtain and maintain, including all required valving, sampling and
permits during construction. The LUMP SUM AMOUNT BID will be paid based on the
percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.
18. Bid Item 44 – Performance Demonstration (Minimum of 0.5% of Total Bid): The
LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be to provide all work necessary to demonstrate proper
operations of the system, including start-up of the equipment. The lump sum price for
performance demonstration will be a minimum of one half percent (0.5%) of the total
contract base bid amount. The CONTRACTOR may apply for payment upon satisfactory
submittal of the start-up reports.
19. Bid Item 45 – Closeout Documentation (Minimum of 0.5% of the Total Bid): The
LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be to provide all documentation necessary to close out
the project. The lump sum price for closeout documentation will be a minimum of one
half percent (0.5%) of the total contract base bid amount. The CONTRACTOR may
apply for payment upon satisfactory submittal of a clean set of as-built surveyed plans
showing locations of all equipment, pipe lines, valves and fittings installed, submit
consent of surety, assurance satisfactory to OWNER that unsettled claims will be
settled, proof to OWNER that taxes, fees, and similar obligations of CONTRACTOR have
been paid, waiver of lien from every entity (including the CONTRACTOR) that provided
services on the project, submittal of final pay request, and a warranty letter stating
CONTRACTOR’s obligation for defects and repairs for the duration of the warranty
period. The CONTRACTOR may apply for payment on the final pay request.
5.03 Unit Price
A. Where payment for items is shown on a unit price basis, payment will be made for the
actual quantity installed and will include all labor, material, and equipment necessary for
such.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7
Force main, Potable Water, Reuse, and Process Piping
1. Bid Item 2 – 2-inch PVC: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full compensation for
all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test, maintain, and all
other cost required to install the 2-inch PVC piping and hose bib for the existing in-
plant reuse system as described herein and within the contract documents, complete
as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The pipe quantities to
be paid for under this section shall be based on the diameter and the
horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the top centerline of
the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with deduction for the laid
length of valves and fittings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
measured length of pipe installed during the requested period as approved by the
Engineer.
2. Bid Item 3 – 2-inch PVC 90 Degree Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 2-inch PVC 90 Degree Bend as
described herein and within the contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans,
specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid
based on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by
the Engineer.
3. Bid Item 4 – 2-inch x 6-inch x 6-inch Tee: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 2-inch x 6-inch x 6-inch Tee as
described herein and within the contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans,
specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid
based on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by
the Engineer.
4. Bid Item 5 – 2-inch Gate Valve: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 2-inch Gate Valve as described
herein and within the contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified,
and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
5. Bid Item 6 – 6-inch Ductile Iron Piping: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 6” DIP for the Septage Receiving
Screen and In-Plant Reuse piping loop as described herein and within the contract
documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer.
The pipe quantities to be paid for under this section shall be based on the diameter
and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the top
centerline of the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with
deduction for the laid length of valves and fittings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall
be paid based on the measured length of pipe installed during the requested period as
approved by the Engineer.
6. Bid Item 7 – 6-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT
will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
construct, test, maintain, and all other cost required to install the 6-inch 90 Degree
Mechanical Joint Bend as described herein and within the contract documents,
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8
complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT
PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the
requested period as approved by the Engineer.
7. Bid Item 8 – 8-inch Ductile Iron Pipe: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 8” DIP for the proposed In-Plant
Pump Station and for the Filter Overflow piping as described herein and within the
contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the
Engineer. The pipe quantities to be paid for under this section shall be based on the
diameter and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the
top centerline of the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with
deduction for the laid length of valves and fittings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall
be paid based on the measured length of pipe installed during the requested period as
approved by the Engineer.
8. Bid Item 9 – 12-inch Ductile Iron Pipe: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 12” DIP for the gravity sewer line
connecting the existing In-Plant Pump Station with the proposed In-Plant Pump Station
and for the reject diversion piping as described herein and within the contract
documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer.
The pipe quantities to be paid for under this section shall be based on the diameter
and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the top
centerline of the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with
deduction for the laid length of valves and fittings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall
be paid based on the measured length of pipe installed during the requested period as
approved by the Engineer.
9. Bid Item 10 – 16-inch Ductile Iron Pipe: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 16” DIP Filter Bypass piping as
described herein and within the contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans,
specified, and directed by the Engineer. The pipe quantities to be paid for under this
section shall be based on the diameter and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear
feet of pipe measured along the top centerline of the pipe in place complete and
acceptable to the Engineer with deduction for the laid length of valves and fittings. The
UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the measured length of pipe installed
during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
10. Bid Item 11 – 12-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID
AMOUNT will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary
to construct, test, maintain, and all other cost required to install the 12-inch 90 Degree
Mechanical Joint Bends as described herein and within the contract documents,
complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT
PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the
requested period as approved by the Engineer.
11. Bid Item 12 – 12-inch 90 Degree MJ x PE Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be
full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,
maintain, and all other cost required to install the 12-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint
by Plain End Bend as described herein and within the contract documents, complete as
shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9
AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the requested
period as approved by the Engineer.
Valves
12. Bid Item 13 – 12-inch Horizontal Swing Check Valve: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT
will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and
equipment and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with
these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based
on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the
Engineer.
13. Bid Item 15 – 12-inch Tapping Sleeve and Valve: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be
full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
14. Bid Item 16 – 12-inch x 16-inch x 16-inch Tapping Sleeve and Valve: The UNIT PRICE
BID AMOUNT will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor,
and equipment and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance
with these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid
based on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by
the Engineer.
Proposed In-Plant Pump Station
15. Bid Item 18 – 25 Horsepower Submersible Pumps: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will
be full compensation for furnishing and installing the lift station’s submersible pumps
and accessories. This includes, but is not limited to, pumps, base elbows, coatings,
guide rails, base plate, anchors, floats, and mounting brackets. The UNIT PRICE BID
AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the requested
period as approved by the Engineer.
Filter Piping Modification
16. Bid Item 24 – 12”x16” Mechanical Joint Reducer: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will
be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment
and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
17. Bid Item 25 – 16-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID
AMOUNT will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and
equipment and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with
these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based
on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the
Engineer.
18. Bid Item 26 – 16-inch 90 Degree Flange Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be
full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10
19. Bid Item 27 – 8-inch 90 Degree Flange Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
20. Bid Item 28 – 8-inch 22.5 Degree Flange Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be
full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
21. Bid Item 29 – 12”x12”x8” Flanged Tee: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
22. Bid Item 30 – Turbidity Probes and Analyzers: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be
full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
R-AWT1 Effluent Disposal Piping Modification
23. Bid Item 33 – 12-inch Magnetic Flow Meter: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT for
furnishing and installing the meter will be compensation in full for furnishing all
material, labor, and equipment and incidentals necessary for installing the meter in
accordance with these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall
be paid based on the number of units installed during the requested period as
approved by the Engineer.
24. Bid Item 34 – 12-inch Uni-flange Fittings: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these
specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the
number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.
25. Bid Item 35 – 12-inch Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapter: The UNIT PRICE BID
AMOUNT will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and
equipment and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with
these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based
on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the
Engineer.
Miscellaneous Items
26. Bid Item 41 – Floor Stand Assembly: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full
compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and
incidentals necessary in order to meet the contract document. The UNIT PRICE BID
AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the requested
period as approved by the Engineer.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11
5.04 Additive Alternates
A. The Owner may select the Base Bid, and add or deduct (as applicable) none, or any
combination of Alternate Bids in no particular order to the Base Bid.
1. Bid Item 1 – Erosion Control: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be full compensation
for all labor, equipment, and materials required for erosion control. All work shall be
in accordance with the contract documents. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be
paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the Engineer.
2. Bid Item 2 – Site Paving, Grading and Stormwater Basin: The LUMP SUM BID
AMOUNT will be compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for
site work, site paving, select fill, earthwork, excavation, backfilling, compaction,
stormwater inlet structure, reinforced concrete piping, rip rap, testing, restoration,
and fencing as necessary and as shown and described in the contract documents. The
LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed
as approved by the Engineer.
Basis of Bid:
ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT
PRICE AMOUNT
General/Civil
1
General Provisions including mobilization, de-mobilization, indemnification, and insurance (maximum of 5% of the Total bid)
1 LS
Force main, Potable Water, Reuse, and Process Piping
2 2-inch PVC 40 LF
3 2-inch 90 Degree Bend (PVC) 3 EA
4 2"x6"x6" Tee 1 EA
5 2-inch Gate Valve 1 EA
6 6-inch DIP 187 LF
7 6-inch 90 Degree MJ Bend 3 EA
8 8-inch DIP 186 LF
9 12-inch DIP 125 LF
10 16-inch DIP 75 LF
11 12-inch 90 Degree MJ Bend 2 EA
12 12-inch 90 Degree MJ x PE Bend 1 EA
Valves
13 12-inch Check Valve 1 EA
14 Check Valve and Meter Vault 1 LS
15 12-inch Tapping Sleeve and Valve 1 EA
16 12”x16”x16” Tapping Sleeve and Valve 1 EA
Existing In-Plant Pump Station
17 Existing In-Plant P.S. Demolition and Modification
1 LS
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 12
Proposed In-Plant Pump Station
18 25 HP Submersible Pumps 3 EA
19 Fiberglass Wetwell and Accessories 1 LS
20 In-Plant P.S. Fittings, Valves, Meter and Miscellaneous Items
1 LS
21 In-Plant P.S. Concrete Pad 1 LS
Headworks Screen Walkway and Railway Modification
22 Screen Walkway and Railway Modification 1 LS
Emergency Eye Wash Station
23 Emergency Eye Wash Station Equipment, Piping, Fittings and Valves
1 LS
Filter Piping Modification
24 12"x16" MJ Reducer 1 EA
25 16-inch 90 Degree MJ Bend 3 EA
26 16-inch 90 Degree FL Bend 1 EA
27 8-inch 90 Degree FL Bend 6 EA
28 8-inch 22.5 Degree FL Bend 2 EA
29 12"x12"x8" FL Tee 2 EA
30 Turbidity Probes/Analyzers 2 EA
31 20-inch Core Drill with Double S.S. Link Seal
1 LS
32 Existing Filter Overflow Piping Demolition 1 LS
R-AWT1 Effluent Disposal Piping Modification
33 12-inch Magnetic Flow Meter 1 EA
34 12-inch Uni-flange Fitting 2 EA
35 12-inch Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapter
5 EA
Septage Receiving Station Modification
36 Rock Trap, Septage Pit, Piping and Fittings Demolition
1 LS
37 Septage Receiving Screw Screen and Fittings
1 LS
38 Septage Receiving Reuse Water Piping Valves, Fittings and Appurtenances
1 LS
39 Septage Receiving Concrete Pad 1 LS
Project Site Electrical
40 Electrical Panel, Conduits and Miscellaneous Electrical Installation
1 LS
Miscellaneous Items
41 Actuated Gate Valve Floor Stand Assembly
3 EA
42 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 1 LS
43 Dewatering 1 LS
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 13
44 Performance Demonstration (Minimum of 0.5% of Total Bid)
1 LS
45 Closeout Documentation (Minimum of 0.5% of Total Bid)
1 LS
TOTAL BASE BID FOR PROJECT 111803.10
All specified cash allowances are included in the price(s) set forth above, and have been
computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.
Total of All Base Bid Items $
Additive Alternates:
ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT
1 Erosion Control 1 LS
2 Site Paving, Grading and Stormwater Basin
1 LS
TOTAL ADDITIVE ALTERNATES FOR PROJECT 111803.10
All specified cash allowances are included in the price(s) set forth above, and have been
computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.
Total of All Additive Alternates Items $
ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION
6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for
final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the
dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.
6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.
ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID
7.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:
A. Required Bid security;
B. Schedule of Values;
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 14
C. List of Proposed Subcontractors;
D. List of Proposed Suppliers;
E. List of Project References;
F. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to
obtain such license within the time for acceptance of Bids;
G. Required Qualification Statement (EJCDC C-451-2013) with supporting data;
H. If Bid amount exceeds $10,000, signed Compliance Statement (RD 400-6). Refer to
specific equal opportunity requirements set forth in the Supplemental General
Conditions;
I. If Bid amount exceeds $25,000, signed Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,
Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Lower Tier Covered Transactions (AD-1048);
J. If Bid amount exceeds $100,000, signed RD Instruction 1940-Q, Exhibit A-01, Certification
for Contracts, Grants and Loans.
ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS
8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions
to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.
ARTICLE 9 – BID SUBMITTAL
BIDDER: [Indicate correct name of bidding entity]
By:
[Signature]
[Printed name]
(If Bidder is a corporation, a limited liability company, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach
evidence of authority to sign.)
Attest:
[Signature]
[Printed name]
Title:
Submittal Date:
Address for giving notices:
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 15
Telephone Number:
Fax Number:
Contact Name and e-mail address:
Bidder’s License No.:
(where applicable)
PENAL SUM FORM
EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013.
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2
BID BOND
Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
BIDDER (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners
3093 Crawfordville Rd.
Crawfordville, FL 32327
BID
Bid Due Date: May 17, 2016
Description (Project Name— Include Location): Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project
Lawhon Mill Rd., Crawfordville, FL
BOND
Bond Number:
Date:
Penal sum $
(Words) (Figures)
Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause
this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
BIDDER SURETY
(Seal) (Seal)
Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By: By:
Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)
Print Name Print Name
Title Title
Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature
Title Title
Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice.
Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
PENAL SUM FORM
EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013.
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 2 of 2
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the
penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond
shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding
Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any
extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding
Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any
extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required
by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable
promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of
Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including
extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.
6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after the Bid due
date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the
state in which the Project is located.
8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown
on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States
Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon
receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority
of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such
Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any
applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at
length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall
govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.
EJCDC® C-510, Notice of Award.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2
NOTICE OF AWARD
Date of Issuance:
Owner: Wakulla County Owner's Contract No.:
Engineer: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Engineer's Project No.: 111803.10
Project: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment
Plant Interim Project
Contract Name:
Bidder:
Bidder’s Address:
TO BIDDER:
You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated May 24, 2016 for the above Contract, and that you
are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
INTERIM PROJECT.
Constructing a screening and septage receiving unit, a grit removal system, a 1.2 MGD biological treatment unit,
tertiary filtration units, disinfection chambers, digestion, dewatering equipment, storage ponds, reclaimed water
pump station, operations building, associated electrical improvements and all appurtenances necessary for a
complete and operational system.
The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is: $ ______________________
5 unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the
Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made available to
Bidder electronically. [revise if multiple copies accompany the Notice of Award]
a set of the Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice
of Award:
1. Deliver to Owner 5 counterparts of the Agreement, fully executed by Bidder.
2. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contract security [e.g., performance and payment bonds]
and insurance documentation as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions,
Articles 2 and 6.
3. Other conditions precedent (if any):
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default,
annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.
Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed
counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in
Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
Owner: Wakulla County
Authorized Signature
By:
Title:
Copy: Engineer
EJCDC® C-510, Notice of Award.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 2 of 2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6
AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)
THIS AGREEMENT is by and between Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners (“Owner”) and
(“Contractor”).
Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1 – WORK
1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows: constructing an in-plant pump station. septage receiving
auger screen unit, valve actuators, filter bypass piping, miscellaneous piping, instrumentation,
electrical improvements and all appurtenances necessary for a complete and operational
system.
ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT
2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is generally described as follows:
Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project
ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER
3.01 The Project has been designed by Baskerville-Donovan, Inc.
3.02 The Owner has retained Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s
representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned
to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES
4.01 Time of the Essence
A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness
for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
4.02 Contract Times: Days
A. The Work will be substantially completed within 180 days after the date when the Contract
Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and
completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General
Conditions within 210 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
4.03 Liquidated Damages
A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01
above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed
and Milestones not achieved within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any
extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the Contract. The parties also recognize the
delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 6
actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of
requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay
(but not as a penalty):
1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $1,500.00 for each day that
expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified in
Paragraph 4.02.A above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially
complete.
2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall
neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time (as
duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final
payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $1,000.00 for each day that expires after such
time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.
3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final
completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently.
4.04 [Deleted]
ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE
5.01 Subject to adjustment under the Contract, Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the amount of: $_______________________.
A. Any specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with Paragraph
13.02 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments
A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the
General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in
the General Conditions.
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage
A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of
Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 25th day of each month during
performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such
Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the
requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of
Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price
Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of
Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract.
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal
to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not
limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract
a. 95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage); If the Work
has been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character
and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 6
as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner
and Engineer, there will be no additional retainage; and
b. 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with
the balance being retainage).
B. Upon Substantial Completion of the entire construction to be provided under the Contract
Documents, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor
to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to
Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent of Engineer’s estimate of
the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be
completed or corrected prior to final payment.
6.03 Final Payment
A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of
the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as
recommended by Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 15.06.
ARTICLE 7 – INTEREST
7.01 All amounts not paid when due shall bear interest at the rate of __0___ percent per annum.
ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS
8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following
representations:
A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, and any data and
reference items identified in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site
and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and
Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect
cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and
drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if
any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.
E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information
commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and
observations obtained from visits to the Site; and the Contract Documents; and the Site-
related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the
effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and
performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures
of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (3) Contractor’s safety precautions and
programs.
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 6
F. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,
Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies,
or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the
Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.
G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at
the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
J. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by
Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon
performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
9.01 Contents
A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:
1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 8 inclusive).
2. Performance bond (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).
3. Payment bond (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).
4. Other bonds.
a. ___ (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).
5. General Conditions (pages 1 to 70, inclusive).
6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 14, inclusive).
7. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.
8. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of 164 sheets with
each sheet bearing the following general title: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment
Plant Interim Project.
9. Addenda (numbers 1 to 2, inclusive).
10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. Contractor’s Bid Schedule of Value (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).
11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Contract and are not attached hereto:
a. Notice to Proceed.
b. Work Change Directives.
c. Change Orders.
d. Field Orders.
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 6
B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as
expressly noted otherwise above).
C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.
D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in
the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 10 – MISCELLANEOUS
10.01 Terms
A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and
the Supplementary Conditions.
10.02 Assignment of Contract
A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party hereto of
any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto
without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without
limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned
without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited
by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an
assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract Documents.
10.03 Successors and Assigns
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to
the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all
covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
10.04 Severability
A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under
any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue
to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract
Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid
and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the
stricken provision.
10.05 Contractor’s Certifications
A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph
10.05:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of
value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the
Contract execution;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of
Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c)
to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 6
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,
with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices
at artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or
affect the execution of the Contract.
10.06 Other Provisions
A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are
based on EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract,
published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee®, and if Owner is the
party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all
modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor,
through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the
Supplementary Conditions.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement.
This Agreement will be effective on _______________________________ (which is the Effective Date of
the Contract).
OWNER: CONTRACTOR:
Wakulla County
By: By:
Title: Title:
(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint
venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)
Attest: Attest:
Title: Title:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:
License No.:
(where applicable)
(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority
to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of
authority to sign and resolution or other documents
authorizing execution of this Agreement.)
NOTE TO USER: Use in those states or other
jurisdictions where applicable or required.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ......................................................................................... 1
1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.02 Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5
Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 6
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6
2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6
2.03 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7
2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7
2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7
Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 8
3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8
3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9
3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10
Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................ 10
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10
4.02 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10
4.03 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10
4.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 10
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11
Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental
Conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 12
5.01 Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 14
5.05 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ...................................................................... 17
Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................... 19
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 19
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 19
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 20
6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23
6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23
6.06 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25
6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 25
Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26
7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26
7.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26
7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 26
7.04 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27
7.05 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28
7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 29
7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31
7.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 31
7.09 Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32
7.10 Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32
7.11 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32
7.12 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 32
7.13 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 33
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 33
7.15 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34
7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36
7.18 Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37
Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................ 38
8.01 Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38
8.02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39
8.03 Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii
Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 40
9.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................ 40
9.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40
9.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40
9.04 Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40
9.06 Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 40
9.07 Change Orders ...................................................................................................................... 40
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41
9.12 Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41
Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................... 41
10.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41
10.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41
10.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42
10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 42
10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 42
10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 42
10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 42
10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .................................................... 42
10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 43
Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 43
11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 43
11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 44
11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 44
11.04 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44
11.05 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45
11.06 Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 45
11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................. 46
11.08 Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 47
Article 12 – Claims ......................................................................................................................... 47
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv
12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................... 47
Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ........................................................ 48
13.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 48
13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 50
13.03 Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 51
Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 52
14.01 Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 52
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 52
14.03 Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 53
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 53
14.05 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 53
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 54
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 54
Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 55
15.01 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 55
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 58
15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 58
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 59
15.05 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 59
15.06 Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 59
15.07 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 61
15.08 Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 61
Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................... 62
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 62
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 62
16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 63
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 63
Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................... 64
17.01 Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 64
Article 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 64
18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 64
18.02 Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 64
18.03 Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 64
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v
18.04 Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 65
18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 65
18.06 Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 65
18.07 Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 65
18.08 Headings ............................................................................................................................... 65
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 65
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with
initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning
indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with
initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and
paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which
clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract
Documents.
2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets
forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer,
and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.
3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by
Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and
which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Contract Documents.
4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices
for the Work to be performed.
5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.
6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents,
and all Addenda.
7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,
Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.
8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes
an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or
the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Contract.
9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with
the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price
or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the
requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the
Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other
relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.
10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in
compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment
of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer
concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work
under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change
Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to
address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a
demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision
regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 65
has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a
Claim.
11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other
material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed
pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and
Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials
Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act,
15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the
Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute,
law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating
to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or
dangerous waste, substance, or material.
12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and
Contractor concerning the Work.
13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which
together comprise the Contract.
14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion
of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .
15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a)
achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the
Work.
16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for
performance of the Work.
17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.
18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and
character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.
19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the
Contract becomes effective.
20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the
Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of
Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or
property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for
the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are
controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and
the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental
Condition.
23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes,
rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies,
agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 65
24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real
property, or personal property.
25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract
requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior
to Substantial Completion of all the Work.
26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of
the Bid.
27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which
the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to
perform the Work.
28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the
Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work,
pursuant to the terms of the Contract.
29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing
the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to
accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.
30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers,
contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing,
commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the
Contract Documents is a part.
31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for,
procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding
Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing
conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual
may be bound in one or more volumes.
32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned
to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative
or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.
33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are
representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which
such portion of the Work will be judged.
34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of
required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals
and the performance of related construction activities.
35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating
portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for
reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and
submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,
whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 65
37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner
upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and
such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.
38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work,
and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the
Work.
39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with
any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.
40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has
progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified
part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so
that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it
is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as
applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner
makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions.
42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements
these General Conditions.
43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor
having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials
or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.
44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the
Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site,
or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site
(except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site.
If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to
conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements
of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective
information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or
environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are
hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under
Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06.
45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,
manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any
encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey
electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other
communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm
water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.
46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the
result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to
produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and
equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing,
start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 65
48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the
Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer,
ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used
in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:
1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,”
“as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional
judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,”
“acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to
describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that
such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to
evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract
Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement
indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and
shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct
the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract
Documents.
C. Day:
1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next
midnight.
D. Defective:
1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard,
test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at
Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or
some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable
condition.
2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or
equipment complete and ready for intended use.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 65
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials,
or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment
complete and ready for intended use.
4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to
specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four
words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and
install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.
F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract
Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner,
Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of
the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each
named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or
elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be
provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the
Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly
deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as
identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other
evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully
executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document
format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of
reproduction.
B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the
Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other
design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract
available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this
provision to Engineer.
2.03 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as
otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to
Engineer for timely review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for
starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones
specified in the Contract;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 65
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and
prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides
the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress
payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate
amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor,
Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding
among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph
2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing
Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required
records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific
individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and
responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit
and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on
behalf of each respective party.
2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference,
attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for
acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with
Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and
adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be
made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly
progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance
will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing,
scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from
Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a
workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and
substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component
parts of the Work.
2.06 Electronic Transmittals
A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor
may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents,
drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other
submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a
secure Project website.
B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then
Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.
C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes
no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items
resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 65
computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or
from those established in applicable transmittal protocols.
ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if
required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or
part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the
electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies
derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed
record version shall govern.
D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether
written or oral.
E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided
herein.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations
1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference
standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or
Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the
standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in
effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there
were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code,
or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or
responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors,
consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract
Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be
effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake
responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents
prepared by or for Engineer.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies:
1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each
part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check
and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to
applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer
any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual
knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 65
error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by
Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued
pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of
the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within
the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable
Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual,
reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor
shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the
Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until
the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or
interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract
Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict,
error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had
actual knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies:
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the
provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall
take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between
such provisions of the Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code,
or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by
reference as a Contract Document); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the
Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents
would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents
A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall
submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract
Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or
relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible
after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the
Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or
decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and
binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner,
unless it appeals by filing a Claim.
C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the
Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or
otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give
written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or
interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter
in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 65
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications,
or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of
Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such
Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the
Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and
specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or
2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse
any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written
consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of
the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to
Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective
Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the
sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the
Contract, whichever date is earlier.
4.02 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times
commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.
4.03 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction
which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the
Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve
the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or
relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to
Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or
requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property
monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
4.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph
2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in
Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in
changing the Contract Times.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 65
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times
shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.
B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes
or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution
of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by
Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress
A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled
to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s
entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment
being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for
delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay,
disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or
Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.
C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by
unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and
those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract
Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete
the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and
exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.
Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract
Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:
1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and
earthquakes;
2. abnormal weather conditions;
3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or
adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8);
and
4. acts of war or terrorism.
D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting
from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility
that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated
with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions,
are governed by Article 5.
E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or
progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent
to the Site.
F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for
any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or
interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 65
G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or
Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying,
disrupting, or interfering event.
ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
5.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which
Contractor must comply in performing the Work.
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement
of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements
are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a
mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and
Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the
storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,
adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or
otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not
unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction
equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility
for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for
Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for
injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas;
provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or
from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is
responsible.
2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area
because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of
the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take
immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise;
(b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with
such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute
resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of
each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses,
and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,
brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party
indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 65
by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions
or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the
Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and
the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work
Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be
loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any
part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger
them.
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
adjacent to the Site;
2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with
respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract
Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely
upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any
geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to
Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,
but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or
shown or indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any
such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 65
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is
uncovered or revealed at the Site either:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is
entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered
and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection
therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and
Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such
condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an
emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so.
B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph,
Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine
the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the
condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site
condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule
information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the
Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in
question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner
in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s
written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement
to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in
question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating
whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or
rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in
part.
D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical
condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or
decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;
subject, however, to the following:
a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in
Paragraph 5.04.A;
b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in
Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 65
c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned
on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work
within the Contract Times.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract
Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or
otherwise; or
b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or
revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study
of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements
or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s
making such commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount
or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any
such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.
4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount
or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later
than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor
regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.
5.05 Underground Facilities
A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is
based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such
Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly
provided in the Supplementary Conditions:
1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any
such information or data provided by others; and
2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor
shall have full responsibility for:
a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground
Facilities at the Site;
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
as being at the Site;
c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such
Underground Facilities, during construction; and
d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and
repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered
or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not
shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 65
becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or
performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by
Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to
that owner and to Owner and Engineer.
C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude
whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,
or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or
schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the
Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question;
determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications
to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground
Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and
recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and
protection of such Underground Facility.
D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of
Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written
statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in
question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility,
indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting
or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in
part.
E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the
Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or
indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference,
causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for,
performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:
a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be
aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the
Underground Facility in question;
b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in
Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;
c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned
on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work
within the Contract Times; and
d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount
or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any
such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.
3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount
or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later
than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor
regarding the Underground Facility in question.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 65
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental
Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and
2. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with
respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract
Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on
the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or
environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for
such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against
Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,
but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or
shown or indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any
such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous
Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such
removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the
scope of the Work.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all
Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or
anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the
costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the
presence of any such Constituents of Concern.
E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose
removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being
within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is
responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall
immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection
with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required
by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm
such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the
necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take
corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such
actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide
Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in
question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition,
and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 65
F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental
Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits
related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such
condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work,
or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.
G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such
Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by
Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of
Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off.
H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work
based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under
such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area
affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change
procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by
Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.
I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them
from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees
and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous
Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was
not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents,
identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or
identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2)
was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in
this Paragraph 5.06.H shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and
against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to
control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or
by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition
created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this
Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and
against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of
Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed
at the Site.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 65
ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at
least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all
of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one
year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction
period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by
Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the
Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the
Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.
B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by
Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and
supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S.
Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be
accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The
evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact
signed the accompanying bond.
C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or
authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required
amounts.
D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent,
or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the
Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor
shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving
rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with
the bond and surety requirements above.
E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from
the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the
performance of the Work.
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions
A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in
the Supplementary Conditions.
B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or
Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or
authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance
policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the
Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under
this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.
C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional
insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the
Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 65
maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon
request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such
required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and
documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block
out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or
endorsement furnished under this provision.
D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional
insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the
Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining
the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any).
Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence
of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and
endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles.
Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in
any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.
E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other
party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or
Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be
construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.
F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by
the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase
prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the
required coverage.
G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the
Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set-off against payment, and exercise
Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required
insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other
party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage,
and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.
I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.
J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on
Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and
entities in the Contract.
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance
A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation
and employer’s liability insurance for:
1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee
benefit acts.
2. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act
coverage (if applicable).
3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death
of Contractor’s employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s
compensation states).
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 65
4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).
B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain
commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of
Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against:
1. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any
person other than Contractor’s employees.
2. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.
3. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction
of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.
C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy
shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form)
and include the following coverages and endorsements:
1. Products and completed operations coverage:
a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.
b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in
the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.
2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not
limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph
7.18.
3. Broad form property damage coverage.
4. Severability of interest.
5. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.
6. Personal injury coverage.
7. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products
and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG
20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their
equivalent.
8. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04,
“Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named
Insured” or its equivalent.
D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance
against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property
damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The
automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.
E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess
liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general
liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to
industry-standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every
one of the underlying policies.
F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy
covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs, as a result
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 65
of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This
insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.
G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability,
umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional
insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall
provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those
arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non-contributory basis.
Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.
H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish
professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design
services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining
applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against
claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by
a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be
maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after
Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a
Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may
be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such
Subcontractor.
I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:
1. include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.
2. be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the
Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.
3. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled,
materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has
been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice,
Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other
insured under the policy.
4. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this
Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or
replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or
returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
5. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that
may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s
other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by
Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable.
J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies,
and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 65
6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance
A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03,
Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own
liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations
under the Contract Documents.
B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies
required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability
policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.
6.05 Property Insurance
A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall
purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis,
in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible
amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and
Regulations). This insurance shall:
1. include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any
individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under
such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the
remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding
Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be
referred to as “insureds.”
2. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance
for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials
and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes
of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact;
aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown,
boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic
activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal;
demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other
than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be
specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical
breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake;
volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available
under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be
provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.
3. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials,
supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar
nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication,
construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or
assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract;
and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent
constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to
the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for
the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring,
falsework, and temporary structures.
4. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property
(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 65
5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the
Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the
premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).
6. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.
7. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of
the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the
builder’s risk insurance.
8. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.
9. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of
loss covered.
10. not include a co-insurance clause.
11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to
any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions.
12. include performance/hot testing and start-up.
13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial
Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is
complete.
B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other
evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this
Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not
be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written
notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any
such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each
other insured.
C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for
costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.
D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the
Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then
Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will
provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk
insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or
occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may
come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or
used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.
E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in
or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this
Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.
F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not
require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction
equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an
employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such
property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what
amount.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 65
6.06 Waiver of Rights
A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s
risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or
damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or
against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss
covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in
addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors
of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of
the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to
the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise
payable under any policy so issued.
B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each
and any of them, for:
1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending
beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by,
arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner;
and
2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or
resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property
insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during
partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion
pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.
C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss
referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of
payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of
them.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a
Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the
Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants,
and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and
subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out
of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk
insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.
6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by
Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 65
policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to
such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other
insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days
after notice of such claim.
B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to
multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as
fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause.
A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of
insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with
such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the
dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced,
the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof
covered by Change Order, if needed.
ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7.01 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently,
devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary
to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident
superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer
except under extraordinary circumstances.
7.02 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the
Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at
all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or
property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract
Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday
through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal
holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays,
Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be
unreasonably withheld.
7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and
assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation,
construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat,
telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and
incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work,
whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new,
except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 65
guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If
required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of
required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected,
protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable
Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
7.04 “Or Equals”
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract
Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier,
the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The
specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function,
appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is
followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted,
Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or
equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described
below.
1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so
that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal”
item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment
will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability,
appearance, strength, and design characteristics;
2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the
results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole;
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service;
and
4) it is not objectionable to Owner.
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times;
and
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named
in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or
equal” item at Contractor’s expense.
C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional
data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability.
No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is
complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal”, which will be
evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will
advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 65
D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request
shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request
shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision
of the Contract Documents.
E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or
equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may
request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph
7.05.
7.05 Substitutes
A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be
furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no
substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other
items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent
possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the
Site.
1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to
that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests
for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other
than Contractor.
2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as
supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under
the circumstances.
3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed
substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The
application:
a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the
general design,
2) be similar in substance to that specified, and
3) be suited to the same use as that specified.
b. will state:
1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will
necessitate a change in Contract Times,
2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a
change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the
design to the proposed substitute item, and
3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection
with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
c. will identify:
1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 65
2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.
d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in
Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors
affected by any resulting change.
B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.
Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute
item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered,
furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines
that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be
evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution
itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times.
Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a
special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a
substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a
substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for
the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute.
Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making
changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with
Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed
substitute at Contractor’s expense.
F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request,
Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution.
The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be
reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor
may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by
timely submittal of a Change Proposal.
7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others
A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the
Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.
B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for
the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.
C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the
Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other
individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has
reasonable objection.
D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to
Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already
deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or
otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner
unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 65
E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require
Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require
a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted
the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for
acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make
written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any
such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis
of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an
acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity.
F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be
entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the
replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30
days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.
G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity,
whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the
completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors
and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and
Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.
I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of
the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.
J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any
of the Work.
K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner,
except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed
herein.
L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall
not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or
delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an
appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to
the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner
and Engineer.
N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information
about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the
particular Subcontractor or Supplier.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 65
O. Nothing in the Contract Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor
2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the
payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in
the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,
process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by
others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the
Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual
knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for
the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be
disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising
out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in
the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not
identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by
patent rights or copyrights.
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement
of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or
resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or
device not specified in the Contract Documents.
7.08 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time
of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a
negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for
providing permanent service to the Work
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 65
7.09 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by
Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which
are applicable during the performance of the Work.
7.10 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to
know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and
losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each
and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to
such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that
the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations,
but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the
submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a
negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of
performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations
having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and
other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on
the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times
resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a
Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.
7.11 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written
interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such
record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during
construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be
available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver
these record documents to Engineer.
7.12 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not
relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the
performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations.
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the
necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 65
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in
storage on or off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground
Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of
construction.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or
loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities,
and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent
to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them
in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in
progress.
C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if
any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are
applicable to the Work.
D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s
safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must
comply while at the Site.
E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to
perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be
remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of
Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone
employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not
attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of
Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly
employed by any of them).
F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such
time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever
Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or
correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
7.13 Safety Representative
A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site
whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining
and supervising of safety precautions and programs.
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data
sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 34 of 65
exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or
Regulations.
7.15 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage,
injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes
that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have
been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a
change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in
response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals
A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements:
1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:
a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings
and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract
Documents;
b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog
numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;
c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered
with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage,
assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities
for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has
satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.
3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any
variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the
Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication
separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of
Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to
Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.
B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop
Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the
accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data
to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 65
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited
purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.
2. Samples:
a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.
b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent
data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as
Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited
purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.
3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the
Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and
approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of
Contractor.
C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with
the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the
Specifications.
D. Engineer’s Review:
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with
the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will
be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or
incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract
Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs
incident thereto.
3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of
the assembly in which the item functions.
4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph
7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific
written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or
Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements
of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.
5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph
7.16.A and B.
6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from
the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances,
change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a
Change Order.
7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample,
or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 65
8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and
commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.
E. Resubmittal Procedures:
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required
number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples
for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to
revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.
2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy
to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer
will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop
Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be
responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-
off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.
3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor
shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner
may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for
such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to
rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.
B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom
Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work
that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:
1. observations by Engineer;
2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment
related thereto by Owner;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;
6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;
7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
8. any correction of defective Work by Owner.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 65
D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into
by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in
the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to
Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.
7.18 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other
obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance
of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily
injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other
than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent
caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or
any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of
the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the
survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to
perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any
limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for
Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’
compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to
the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:
1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings,
opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of
the injury or damage.
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services
are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless
such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to
provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.
B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,
materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must
satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly
licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 65
Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such
professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when
submitted to Engineer.
C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and
completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design
professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance
and design criteria that such services must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and
design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except
design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph
7.16.D.1.
E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria
specified by Owner or Engineer.
ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
8.01 Other Work
A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may
perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by
Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner
may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and
facilities at or adjacent to the Site.
B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or
through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice
thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding
the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information
to Contractor.
C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility
owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s
employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for
the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other
work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required
to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly
integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by
cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor
may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose
work will be affected.
D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work
performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and
promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other
work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of
Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such
other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent
defects and deficiencies in such other work.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 65
8.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent
to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to
arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be
set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of
any such other work:
1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various contractors;
2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and
responsibility; and
3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole
authority and responsibility for such coordination.
8.03 Legal Relationships
A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s
employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to
the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts,
interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through
actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal
seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this
paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The
entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account
information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the
Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms
of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be
conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other
contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference
that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the
Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to
complete the Work within the Contract Times.
B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying,
disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner
performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures
and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other
contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to
Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual
rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this
paragraph.
C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees,
Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable
direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of
Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s
other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may
impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 65
D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor,
or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s
failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim
arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at
or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against
Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the
claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or
otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law,
and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of
them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out
of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.
ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
9.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all
communications to Contractor through Engineer.
9.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor
makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s
status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.
9.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
9.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the
Agreement.
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings
A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph
5.01.
B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points
are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.
C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports
of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions
relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.
9.06 Insurance
A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and
property insurance are set forth in Article 6.
9.07 Change Orders
A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 65
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth
in Paragraph 14.02.B.
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible
for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,
or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will
not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is
set forth in Paragraph 5.06.
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that
financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract
Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).
9.12 Safety Programs
A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been
informed.
B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.
ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10.01 Owner’s Representative
A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative
during construction are set forth in the Contract.
10.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of
construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and
qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the
various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such
visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the
Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be
required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or
quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a
greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the
Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep
Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against
defective Work.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority
and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 65
or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not
supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means,
methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions
and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
10.03 Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project
Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the
progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such
Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and
limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner
designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not
Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and
limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the
Supplementary Conditions.
10.04 Rejecting Defective Work
A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.
10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set
forth in Paragraph 7.16.
B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings
submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in
Paragraph 7.19.
C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.
D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.
10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.
10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and
judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for
initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such
decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will
not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings,
interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.
10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other
provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to
exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or
performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise
to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee
or agent of any of them.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 43 of 65
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will
not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the
Work.
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation
and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates
of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by
Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the
results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also
apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.
10.09 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which
Engineer has been informed.
ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK
11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work
Change Directive, or a Field Order.
1. Change Orders:
a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in
the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must
be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish
amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the
Contract Price or Contract Times.
b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work,
(2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3)
other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the
Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.
2. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price
or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification
ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a
subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the
Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if
negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract
Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding
change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 44 of 65
adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days
after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must
submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times,
or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive.
3. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not
involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible
with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated
by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and
will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work
involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in
the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work
at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.
11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such
changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change
involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other
engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if
Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract
Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such
document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a
deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted
Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the
Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work
that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with
Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.
11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency
as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph
14.05.
11.04 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any
Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items
involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or
2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for
overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or
3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 45 of 65
the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a
Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph
11.04.C).
C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be
determined as follows:
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee
shall be 15 percent;
b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five
percent;
c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus
a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and
11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent
of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the
Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with
respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of
the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the
amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier
Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the
maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of
the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;
d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4,
13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;
e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which
results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in
cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of
such net decrease; and
f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment
in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in
accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.
11.05 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any
Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article
12.
B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in
Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.
11.06 Change Proposals
A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the
Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the
requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under
the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 65
the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or
Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed
change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.
1. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but
in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after
such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the
proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and
Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data
shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate
and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire
adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event.
Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any
comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.
2. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after
receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole,
approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in
writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take
action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at
any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of
Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the
time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.
3. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and
Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under
Article 12.
B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design
(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or
other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the
Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of
such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose
to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.
11.07 Execution of Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:
1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties,
including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in
accordance with a Work Change Directive;
2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly
contested such set-off;
3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b)
required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or
Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the
parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work
involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other
engineering or technical matters; and
4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the
substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 65
B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed
under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as
if fully executed.
11.08 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting
the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but
not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be
Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect
the effect of any such change.
ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS
12.01 Claims
A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted
to the Claims process set forth in this Article:
1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;
2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other
relief under the Contract Documents; and
3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the
design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of
the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.
B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party
to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event
giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the
decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the
Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with
the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the
Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in
good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of
Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately
reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.
C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full
consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the
exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for
resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in
writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.
D. Mediation:
1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to
mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim
submittal and response process.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement,
either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the
Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If
the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 65
submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the
mediation, as determined by the mediator.
3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.
E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in
part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other
party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.
F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim
may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does
not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any
time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction,
the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A
denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other
party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.
G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,
whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a
Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become
final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be
incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work,
the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.
ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
13.01 Cost of the Work
A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum
of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined
below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:
1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract
Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or
2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other
adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined
on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or
incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event
giving rise to the adjustment.
B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in
the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of
the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall
include only the following items:
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of
the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor.
Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other
personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed
full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the
Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the
cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions,
unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and
retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 49 of 65
thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on
Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent
authorized by Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including
costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in
connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner
deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash
discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns
from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor
shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by
Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from
subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to
Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will
be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the
basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall
be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as
provided in this Paragraph 13.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically
related to the Work.
5. Supplemental costs including the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of
Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies,
equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and
hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of
the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed
which remain the property of Contractor.
c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof,
whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements
approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation,
loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs
shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any
such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no
longer necessary for the Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor,
or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of
them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection
with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the
deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with
Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 50 of 65
other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable.
Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval
of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of
the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier
services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by
the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.
C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals
(of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers,
engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and
contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by
Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general
administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule
of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by
Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to
be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at
the Site.
3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital
employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,
including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or
equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not
specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.
D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus,
Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any
Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in
Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be
determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.
E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined
pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in
accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable
to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
13.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named
in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such
sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 51 of 65
B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:
1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade
discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at
the Site, and all applicable taxes; and
2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,
profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included
in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional
payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the
sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by
Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
13.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price
Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an
amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price
Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for
the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to
Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be
adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary
determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by
recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision
thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual
conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of
the following paragraph.
E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor
may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the
Contract Price if:
1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and
3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of
having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a
decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any
such increase or decrease.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 52 of 65
ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK
14.01 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the
Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing.
Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them
of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as
applicable.
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts
thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.
B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory,
or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required
by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs
incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the
provisions of Paragraph 14.05.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part
thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other
representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging
and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith,
and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and
tests required:
1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate
responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;
2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work;
3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;
4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to
be incorporated into the Work; and
5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to
Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing
laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner,
Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.
F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered
by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by
Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s
expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 53 of 65
cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to
such notice.
14.03 Defective Work
A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not
defective.
B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective,
and to reject defective Work.
C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has
actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.
D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of
defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated,
installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the
Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.
E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no
action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any,
on said Work.
F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations
with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages
arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the
inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective
Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is
defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective
Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the
measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then
Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner
prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final
payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the
design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety).
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s
evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved
by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent
not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the
necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be
incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the
Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may
impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of
defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to
Owner.
14.05 Uncovering Work
A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or
not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 54 of 65
B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if
requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace
the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.
C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer
or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover,
expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may
require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and
equipment.
1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for
all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering,
exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or
reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work
of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner
shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.
2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly
attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of
the determination that the Work is not defective.
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop
the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;
however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of
Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner
may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and
suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials
and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are
stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and
employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to
the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the
rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-
offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 55 of 65
include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed
or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in
the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and
remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.
ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD
15.01 Progress Payments
A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will
serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application
for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will
be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under
the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on
Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.
B. Applications for Payments:
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress
payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer
for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the
Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is
requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the
Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other
documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free
and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by
appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect
Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.
2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an
affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account
of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate
obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.
3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
C. Review of Applications:
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including
each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present
the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing
Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment
will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s
observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design
professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge,
information and belief:
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 56 of 65
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon
Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the
Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for
Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the
recommendation); and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear
to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the
Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in
progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities
specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle
Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold
payment to Contractor.
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending
payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment,
will impose responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,
or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or
c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to
Contractor’s performance of the Work, or
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has
used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to
Owner free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in
Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated
in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.
6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s
opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph
14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 57 of 65
e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would
constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause
under the Contract Documents.
D. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s
recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will
become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
E. Reductions in Payment by Owner:
1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner
is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:
a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the
performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or
damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of
the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from
workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and
Regulations, and patent infringement;
b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid
damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the
Site;
c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible;
e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal
reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return
visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;
f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph
14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a
termination for cause has occurred;
j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve
Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;
k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and
discharge of such Liens;
l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount
recommended.
2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge
or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor
immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action
and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 58 of 65
remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay
Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner
and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction
imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal
contesting the reduction.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified,
the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by
Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment
furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title
defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven
days after the time of payment by Owner.
15.03 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall
notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and
request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the
same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be
completed or corrected before final payment.
B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving
the reasons therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a
preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial
Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the
preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any
provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the
provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not
substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary
certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially
complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the
certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the
Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver
to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch
list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary
certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.
D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and
Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following
Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of
the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a
permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree
otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of
the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or
occupancy of the Work.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 59 of 65
E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor
may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the
progress payment procedures set forth above.
F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and
complete or correct items on the punch list.
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract
Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately
functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended
purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder
of the Work, subject to the following conditions:
1. At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or
occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If
and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,
Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A
through E for that part of the Work.
2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor
considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer
shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of
completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially
complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the
provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect
thereof and access thereto.
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other
property insurance.
15.05 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and
will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the
Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately
take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
15.06 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment:
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all
corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with
the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 60 of 65
inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment.
2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously
delivered) by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all
Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens
or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.
d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and
e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all
Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as
approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit
of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material,
and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and
equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner
might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other
burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any
Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor
may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner
against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor
and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.
B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:
1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is
satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under
the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final
Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final
payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such
recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in
Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with
respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice
to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of
Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to
Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment,
in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application for Payment.
C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is
ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final
payment.
D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application
for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer
(less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation,
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 61 of 65
including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the
provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by
Owner to Contractor.
15.07 Waiver of Claims
A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights
against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens,
from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from
Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special
guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s
continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.
B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all
claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly
submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.
15.08 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the
Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is
found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that
Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other
adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be
defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with
Owner’s written instructions:
1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;
2. correct such defective Work;
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and
replace it with Work that is not defective, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to
the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or
in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have
the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and
replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to
such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all
costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous
service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item
may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected
or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with
respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such
correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 62 of 65
E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and
warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a
waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer.
Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the
Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such
suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later
than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by
Contractor and justify termination for cause:
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);
2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the
Contract Documents;
3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or
4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving
Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration
that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to:
1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that
the Contract is terminated; and
2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.
C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has
terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take
possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete
the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if
Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its
failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.
E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to
receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the
Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs,
losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid
to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses,
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 63 of 65
and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner.
Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as
to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change
Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be
required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety
under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due
Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions
of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent
provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.
16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience
A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such
case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for
overhead and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents
in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such expenses; and
3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs
incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.
B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue,
or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90
consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2)
Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or
(3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then
Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided
Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate
the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph
16.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is
submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the
Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon.
The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a
Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 64 of 65
expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted
by this paragraph.
ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
17.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final
resolution under the provisions of this Article:
1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in
full; and
2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under
the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.
B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner
or Contractor may:
1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the
Supplementary Conditions; or
2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution
process; or
3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or
mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the
dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS
18.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it
will be deemed to have been validly given if:
1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or
to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last
business address known to the sender of the notice.
18.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period
falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable
jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.
18.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and
remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be
construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of
them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty
or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will
be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with
each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 65 of 65
18.04 Limitation of Damages
A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution,
and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to
Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in
connection with any other project or anticipated project.
18.05 No Waiver
A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision,
nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.
18.06 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or
given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the
Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or
termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
18.07 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
18.08 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute
parts of these General Conditions.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 13
Supplementary Conditions
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of
the Construction Contract, EJCDC® C-700 (2013 Edition). All provisions that are not so
amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings
stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address
system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added thereto.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SC-1.01.A.8 Change Order Form 3
SC-1.01.1.48 Work Change Directive 3
SC-1.01.1.49 Abnormal Weather Conditions 3
SC-1.01.1.50 Agency 3
SC-2.02.A. Contract Copies 3
SC-2.06.B Deleted 3
SC-4.01.A Contract Time 3
SC-4.05.C.2 Abnormal Weather Conditions 3
SC-5.03 Subsurface Conditions 3
SC 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions 3
SC 6.03 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 4
SC-6.05.A. Contractor’s Floater Insurance 5
SC-7.02.B. Working Hours and Holidays 5
SC-7.04.A “Or-equal” 5
SC-7.06.A Subcontractor Limits 6
SC-7.06.B Deleted 6
SC-7.06.E Replacement of Subcontractor 6
SC-10.03 Resident Project Representative 6
SC-11.07.C Contract Change Orders 9
SC-13.02.C Deleted 9
SC-15.01.B Applications for Payment 9
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 13
SC-15.01.B.3 Retainage 9
SC-15.01.B.4 Application for Payment Form 9
SC-15.01.D.1 Payment Becomes Due 9
SC-15.02.A Contractor’s Warranty of Title 9
SC-18.09 Tribal Sovereignty 9
SC-19 Article 19 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS 10
SC-19.01 Agency Not a Party 10
SC-19.02 Contract Approval 10
SC-19.03 Conflict of Interest 10
SC-19.04 Gratuities 10
SC-19.05 Small, Minority and Women’s Businesses 10
SC-19.06 Anti-Kickback 11
SC-19.07 Clean Air and Pollution Control Acts 11
SC-19.08 Equal Opportunity Requirements 11
SC-19.09 Restrictions on Lobbying 12
SC-19.10 Environmental Requirements 12
SC-19.11 Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards 13
SC-19.12 Debarment and Suspension 13
SC-19.13 Procurement of Recovered Materials 13
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 13
SC-1.01.A.8 Add the following language at the end of the last sentence of Paragraph 1.01.A.8:
The Change Order form to be used on this Project is EJCDC C-941. Agency approval is
required before Change Orders are effective.
SC-1.01.A.48 Add the following language at the end of the last sentence of Paragraph 1.01.A.48:
A Work Change Directive cannot change Contract Price or Contract Times without a
subsequent Change Order.
SC-1.01.A.49 Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 1.01.A.48:
Abnormal Weather Conditions - Conditions of extreme or unusual weather for a given
region, elevation, or season as determined by the Engineer. Extreme or unusual
weather that is typical for a given region, elevation, or season should not be
considered Abnormal Weather Conditions.
SC-1.01.A.50 Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 1.01.A.49:
Agency - The Project is financed in whole or in part by USDA Rural Utilities Service
pursuant to the Consolidated Farm and Rural Development Act (7 USC Section 1921 et
seq.). The Rural Utilities Service programs are administered through the USDA Rural
Development offices; therefore, the Agency for these documents is USDA Rural
Development.
SC-2.02.A. Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows:
Owner shall furnish to Contractor five copies of the Contract Documents (including
one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic
portable document format (PDF).
SC-2.06.B Delete Paragraph 2.06.B and replace it with the term [Deleted].
SC-4.01.A Amend the last sentence of Paragraph 4.01.A by striking out the following words:
In no event will be Contract Time commence to run later than the sixtieth day after
the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract,
whichever date is earlier.
SC-4.05.C.2 Amend Paragraph 4.05.C.2 by striking out the following test: “abnormal weather
conditions;” and inserting the following text:
Abnormal Weather Conditions;
SC-5.03 Delete Paragraphs 5.03 C and 5.03 D in their entirety and insert the following:
C. No reports or drawings related to subsurface explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site are known to Owner:
D. Not Used
SC 5.06 Delete Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B in their entirety and insert the following:
A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the
Site are known to Owner.
B. Not Used.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 13
SC 6.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.03.J:
K. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General
Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or
greater where required by Laws and Regulations:
1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1
and A.2 of the General Conditions:
State: Statutory
Federal, if applicable (e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory
Employer’s Liability:
Bodily injury, each accident $ 1,000,000
Bodily injury by disease, each employee $ 1,000,000
Bodily injury/disease aggregate $ 1,000,000
2. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and
6.03.C of the General Conditions:
General Aggregate $ 2,000,000
Products - Completed Operations Aggregate $ 1,000,000
Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000
Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property
Damage) $ 1,000,000
3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D. of the General Conditions:
Bodily Injury:
Each person $ 1,000,000
Each accident $ 1,000,000
Property Damage:
Each accident $ 1,000,000
[or]
Combined Single Limit of $ 1,000,000
4. Excess or Umbrella Liability:
Per Occurrence $ 2,000,000
General Aggregate $ 2,000,000
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 5 of 13
5. Contractor’s Pollution Liability:
Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000
General Aggregate $ 1,000,000
If box is checked, Contractor is not required to provide Contractor’s
Pollution Liability insurance under this Contract
7. Contractor’s Professional Liability:
Each Claim $ 1,000,000
Annual Aggregate $ 1,000,000
SC-6.05.A. Delete Paragraph 6.05.A of the General Conditions and substitute the following in its
place:
Contractor shall provide and maintain installation floater insurance for property under
the care, custody, or control of Contractor. The installation floater insurance shall be a
broad form or “all risk” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies,
machinery, fixtures, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work.
Coverage under the Contractor’s installation floater will include:
1. any loss to property while in transit,
2. any loss at the Site, and
3. any loss while in storage, both on-site and off-site.
Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk, or limited to property for
which the Contractor is legally liable. The Contractor will be solely responsible for any
deductible carried under this coverage and claims on materials, supplies, machinery,
fixture, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in
storage. This policy will include a waiver of subrogation applicable to Owner,
Contractor, Engineer, all Subcontractors, and the officers, directors, partners,
employees, agents and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them.
SC-7.02.B. Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.02.B:
1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Monday through Friday;
2. Owner's legal holidays are New Years, MLK Jr. Birthday, Good Friday, Memorial
Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving (2 days),
Christmas (2 days).
SC-7.04.A Amend the third sentence of Paragraph 7.04.A by striking out the following words:
Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that
no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item is permitted.
SC-7.04.A.1 Amend the last sentence of Paragraph a.3 by striking out “and;” and adding a period
at the end of Paragraph a.3.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 6 of 13
SC-7.04.A.1 Delete paragraph 7.04.A.1.a.4 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
[Deleted]
SC-7.06.A Amend Paragraph 7.06.A by adding the following text to the end of the paragraph:
The Contractor shall not award work valued at more than fifty percent of the Contract
Price to Subcontractor(s), without prior written approval of the Owner.
SC-7.06.B Delete paragraph 7.06.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
[Deleted]
SC-7.06.E Amend the second sentence of Paragraph 7.06.E by striking out “Owner may also
require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that”.
SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.A:
B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at
the Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will
confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions.
1. General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be
with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall only
be through or with the full knowledge and approval of Contractor. RPR shall
generally communicate with Owner only with the knowledge of and under
the direction of Engineer.
2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and
Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and
consult with Engineer concerning acceptability.
3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as
preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other
Project-related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes
thereof.
4. Liaison:
a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally
through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in
providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the
Contract Documents.
b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when
Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.
c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when
required for proper execution of the Work.
5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when
clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed
and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by
Engineer.
6. Shop Drawings and Samples:
a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor-approved Shop
Drawings.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 7 of 13
b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and
notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination.
c. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion
of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which
RPR believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.
7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for
modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions,
together with RPR’s recommendations, if any, to Engineer. Transmit to
Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer.
8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work:
a. Conduct on-Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist
Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of
Contractor’s work in progress is defective, will not produce a
completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents,
or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents,
or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any
inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer
of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected
or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special
testing, inspection or approval.
9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start-ups:
a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start-ups and operating and
maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate
Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records
thereof.
b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to
the test procedures and systems start-ups.
10. Records:
a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording
Contractor’s hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site,
weather conditions, data relative to questions of Change Orders, Field
Orders, Work Change Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors,
deliveries of equipment or materials, daily activities, decisions,
observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in
the case of observing test procedures; and send copies to Engineer.
b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, web site
locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors,
and major Suppliers of materials and equipment.
c. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 8 of 13
11. Reports:
a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the
Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and
schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals.
b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work
Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from
Contractor.
c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents,
emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or
delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the
discovery of any Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental
Condition.
12. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with Contractor for
compliance with the established procedure for their submission and
forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the
relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work
completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not
incorporated in the Work.
13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the
Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and
maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents
to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items
actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have
these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner
prior to payment for that part of the Work.
14. Completion:
a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial
Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and
the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.
b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion
of the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a
final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be
remedied.
c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or
corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning
acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work.
C. The RPR shall not:
1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of
materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items).
2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract
Documents.
3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or
Suppliers.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 9 of 13
4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of
the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s
work.
5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or
safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities
or operations of Owner or Contractor.
6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted
off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.
7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than
Contractor.
8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.
SC-11.07.C Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 11.07.B :
All Contract Change Orders must be concurred in by the Agency before they are
effective.
SC-13.02.C Delete Paragraph 13.02.C in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
[Deleted]
SC-15.01.B Amend the second sentence of Paragraph 15.01.B.1 by striking out the following text:
“a bill of sale, invoice, or other.”
SC-15.01.B.3 Add the following language at the end of paragraph 15.01.B.3:
No payments will be made that would deplete the retainage, place in escrow any
funds that are required for retainage, or invest the retainage for the benefit of the
Contractor.
SC-15.01.B.4 Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 15.01.B.3.
The Application for Payment form to be used on this project is EJCDC C-620. The
Agency must approve all Applications for Payment before payment is made.
SC-15.01.D.1 Delete Paragraph 15.01.D.1 in it entirety and insert the following in its place:
The Application for Payment with Engineer’s recommendations will be presented to
the Owner and Agency for consideration. If both the Owner and Agency find the
Application for Payment acceptable, the recommended amount less any reduction
under the provisions of Paragraph 15.01. E will become due twenty (20) days after the
Application for Payment is presented to the Owner, and the Owner will make
payment to the Contractor.
SC-15.02.A Amend Paragraph 15.02.A by striking out the following text: “no later than seven days
after the time of payment by Owner” and insert “no later than the time of payment by
Owner.”
SC-18.09 Add the following new paragraph after Paragraph 18.08:
Tribal Sovereignty. No provision of this Agreement will be constructed by any of the
signatories as abridging or debilitating any sovereign powers of the Creek-Seminole
Tribe; affecting the trust-beneficiary relationship between the Secretary of the
Interior, Tribe, and Indian landowners(s); or interfering with the government-to-
government relationship between the United States and the Tribe.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 10 of 13
SC-19 Add Article 19 titled “FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS”
SC-19.01 Add the following language as Paragraph 19.01 with the “Agency Not a Party”;
A. This Contract is expected to be funded in part with funds provided by Agency.
Neither Agency, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees is a party
to this Contract.
SC-19.02 Add the following sections after Article 19.01 with the title “Contract Approval”:
A. Owner and Contractor will furnish Owner’s attorney such evidence as required
so that Owner’s attorney can complete and execute the following “Certificate
of Owner’s Attorney (Attachment GC-A) before Owner submits the executed
Contract Documents to Agency for approval.
B. Concurrence by Agency in the award of the Contract is required before the
Contract is effective.
SC-19.03 Add the following language after Article 19.02.B with the title “Conflict of Interest”:
Contractor may not knowingly contract with a supplier or manufacturer if the
individual or entity who prepared the plans and specifications has a corporate or
financial affiliation with the supplier or manufacturer. Owner’s officers, employees, or
agents shall not engage in the award or administration of this Contract if a conflict of
interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when: (i) the
employee, officer or agent; (ii) any member of their immediate family; (iii) their
partner or (iv) an organization that employs, or is about to employ, any of the above,
has a financial interest in Contractor. Owner’s officers, employees, or agents shall
neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of monetary value from
Contractor or subcontractors.
SC-19.04 Add the following language after Article 19.03.A with the title “Gratuities”:
A. If Owner finds after a notice and hearing that Contractor, or any of
Contractor’s agents or representatives, offered or gave gratuities (in the
form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise) to any official, employee, or agent
of Owner or Agency in an attempt to secure this Contract or favorable
treatment in awarding, amending, or making any determinations related to
the performance of this Contract, Owner may, by written notice to
Contractor, terminate this Contract. Owner may also pursue other rights
and remedies that the law or this Contract provides. However, the existence
of the facts on which Owner bases such findings shall be an issue and may be
reviewed in proceedings under the dispute resolution provisions of this
Contract.
B. In the event this Contract is terminated as provided in paragraph 19.04.A,
Owner may pursue the same remedies against Contractor as it could pursue
in the event of a breach of this Contract by Contractor. As a penalty, in
addition to any other damages to which it may be entitled by law, Owner
may pursue exemplary damages in an amount (as determined by Owner)
which shall not be less than three nor more than ten times the costs
Contractor incurs in providing any such gratuities to any such officer or
employee.
SC-19.05 Add the following language after Article 19.04.B with the title “Small, Minority and
Women’s Businesses”:
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 11 of 13
A. Contracting with small and minority businesses, women’s business
enterprises, and labor surplus area firms. If Contractor intends to let any
subcontracts for a portion of the work, Contractor must take all necessary
affirmative steps to assure that minority businesses, women’s business
enterprises and labor surplus firms are used when possible. Affirmative
steps must include:
(1) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women’s business
enterprises on solicitation lists:
(2) Assuring that small and minority businesses, and women’s business
enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources;
(3) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller
tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and
minority businesses, and women’s business enterprises;
(4) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which
encourage participation by small and minority businesses, and women’s
business enterprises;
(5) Using the services and assistance, as appropriate, of such organizations
as the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business
Development Agency of the Department of Commerce; and.
SC-19.06 Add the following after Article 19.05.A.(5) with the title “Anti-Kickback”:
A. Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act (18 USC 874
and 40 USC 276c) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29
CFR Part 3, “Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public
Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants of the United
States”). The Act provides that Contractor or subcontractor shall be
prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the
construction, completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of
the compensation to which they are otherwise entitled. Owner shall report
all suspected or reported violations to Agency.
SC-19.07 Add the following after Article 19.06.A with the title “Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C.
7401-7671q.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387), as
amended”:
A. Contractor to agree to comply with all applicable standards, orders or
regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q) and
the federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387.
Violations must be reported to the Federal awarding agency and the
Regional Office of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
SC-19.08 Add the following after Article 19.07.A with the title “Equal Employment
Opportunity”:
A. The Contract is considered a federally assisted construction contract. Except
as otherwise provided under 41 CFR Part 60, all contracts that meet the
definition of “federally assisted construction contract” in 41 CFR 60-1.3
must include the equal opportunity clause provided under 41 CFR 160-
1.4(b), in accordance with Executive Order 11246, “Equal Employment
Opportunity” (30 FR 12319, 12935, 3 CFR Part, 1964-1965 Comp., p. 339),
as amended by Executive Order 11375, “Amending Executive Order 11246
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 12 of 13
Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity,” and implementing regulations
at 41 CFR Part 60, “Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs,
Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor.”
SC-19.9 Add the following after Article 19.08.A with the title “Byrd Anti-Lobbying
Amendment (31 U.S.C. 1352”:
A. Contractors that apply or bid for an award exceeding $100,000 must file the
required certification (RD Instruction 1940-Q, Exhibit A-1). The Contractor
certifies to the Owner and every subcontractor certifies to the Contractor
that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any
person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer
or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of
Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with
obtaining the Contract if it is covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. The Contractor
and every subcontractor must also disclose any lobbying with non-Federal
funds that takes place in connection with obtaining an Federal award. Such
disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the Owner. Necessary
certification and disclosure forms shall be provided by Owner.
SC-19.10 Add the following after Article 19.09.A with the title “Environmental
Requirements”:
When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth
excavations, Contractor shall comply with the following environmental conditions:
A. Wetlands –When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials
on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise
convert wetlands.
B. Floodplains –When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction
materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or
otherwise convert 100-year floodplain areas (Standard Flood Hazard Area)
delineated on the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency Floodplain
Maps, or other appropriate maps, e.g., alluvial soils on NRCS Soil Survey
Maps.
C. Historic Preservation – Any excavation by Contractor that uncovers an
historical or archaeological artifact or human remains shall be immediately
reported to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be
temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions
issued by Agency after consultation with the State Historic Preservation
Officer (SHPO).
D. Endangered Species – Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species
Act, which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened
species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of
endangered and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to
the attention of Contractor, Contractor will immediately report this
evidence to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be
temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions
issued by Agency after consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service.
EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 13 of 13
SC-19.11 Add the following after Article 19.10.D with the title “Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3701-3708)”:
A. Where applicable, for contracts awarded by the Owner in excess of $100,000 that
involve the employment of mechanics or laborers, the Contractor bust comply
with 40 U.S.C. 3702 and 3704, as supplemented by Department of Labor
regulations (29 CFR Part 5). Under 40 U.S.C. 3702 of the Act, the Contractor must
compute the wages of every mechanic and laborer on the basis of a standard work
week of 40 hours. Work in excess of the standard work week is permissible
provided that the worker is compensated at a rate of not less than one and a half
times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in the work
week. The requirements of 40 U.S.C. 3704 are applicable to construction work and
provide that o laborer or mechanic must be required to work in surroundings or
under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous. These
requirements do not apply to the purchases of supplies or materials or articles
ordinarily available on the open market, or contracts for transportation or
transmission of intelligence.
SC 19.12 Add the following after Article 19.11.A with the title “Debarment and Suspension
(Executive Orders 12549 and 12689)”:
A. A contract award (see 2CFR 180.220) must not be made to parties listed on the
governmentwide exclusions in the System for Award Management (SAM), in
accordance with the OMB guidelines at 2 CFR 180 that implement Executive
orders 12549 (3 CFR Part 1986 Comp., p. 189) and 12689 (3 CFR Part 1989 Comp.,
p. 235), “Debarment and Suspension.” SAM Exclusions contains the names of
parties debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded by agencies, as well as parties
declared ineligible under statutory or regulatory authority other than Executive
Order 12549.
SC 19.13 Add the following after Article 19.12.A with the title “Procurement of Recovered
Materials”:
A. The Contractor must comply with 2 CFR part 200.322, “Procurement of recovered
materials.”
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 1 of 3
PERFORMANCE BOND
CONTRACTOR (name and address):
SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):
OWNER (name and address): Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners
3093 Crawfordville Hwy.
Crawfordville, FL 32327
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Effective Date of the Agreement:
Amount:
Description (name and location): Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project
Lawhon Mill Rd., Crawfordville, FL
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause
this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
(seal) (seal)
Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By: By:
Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)
Print Name Print Name
Title Title
Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature
Title Title
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to
Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 2 of 3
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction
Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety
and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except
when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in
Paragraph 3.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract,
the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:
3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and
the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor
Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is
requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and
Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner
does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5)
business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a
conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the
Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any
conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held
within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the
Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety
agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to
perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall
not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a
Contractor Default;
3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates
the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and
3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the
Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction
Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the
Construction Contract.
4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice
requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply
with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the
Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety
demonstrates actual prejudice.
5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the
Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the
following actions:
5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the
Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;
5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction
Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;
5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified
contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for
performance and completion of the Construction Contract,
arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the
Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence,
to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed
by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the
Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of
damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of
the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the
Contractor Default; or
5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for
completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable
promptness under the circumstances:
5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for
which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as
practicable after the amount is determined, make payment
to the Owner; or
5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the
Owner, citing the reasons for denial.
6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with
reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default
on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice
from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its
obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to
enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as
provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the
Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice
the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the
Owner.
7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then
the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater
than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and
the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater
than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to
the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract
Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:
7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of
defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;
7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs
resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the
actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and
7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are
specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by
delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.
8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the
Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.
9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for
obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction
Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced
or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of
action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than
the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns.
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 3 of 3
10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including
changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be
instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in
which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted
within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within
two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years
after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this
Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are
void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations
available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be
applicable.
12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be
mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their
signature appears.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory
or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was
to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said
statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and
provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement
shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent
is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a
common law bond.
14. Definitions
14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount
payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction
Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including
allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be
received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims
for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all
valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the
Contractor under the Construction Contract.
14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the
Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all
Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and
the Contract Documents.
14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which
has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to
comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.
14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not
been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required
under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or
comply with the other material terms of the Construction
Contract.
14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise
the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and
subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to
be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be
Contractor.
16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 4 of 3
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 1 of 3
PAYMENT BOND
CONTRACTOR (name and address):
SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):
OWNER (name and address): Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners
3093 Crawfordville Hwy.
Crawfordville, FL 32327
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Effective Date of the Agreement:
Amount:
Description (name and location): Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project
Lawhon Mill Road, Crawfordville Road, FL
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause
this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
(seal) (seal)
Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By: By:
Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)
Print Name Print Name
Title Title
Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature
Title Title
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 2 of 3
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference
to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 3 of 3
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor,
materials, and equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract, which is
incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following
terms.
2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due
to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds
harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits
by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,
materials, or equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety
and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this
Bond.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction
Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this
Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the
Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in
Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against
the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or
entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment
furnished for use in the performance of the Construction
Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands,
liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.
4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph
3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense
defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a
duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.
5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond
shall arise after the following:
5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with
the Contractor,
5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-
payment to the Contractor, stating with
substantial accuracy the amount claimed
and the name of the party to whom the
materials were, or equipment was,
furnished or supplied or for whom the
labor was done or performed, within
ninety (90) days after having last
performed labor or last furnished
materials or equipment included in the
Claim; and
5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the
address described in Paragraph 13).
5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct
contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to
the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph
13).
6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is
given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to
satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of
non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.
7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph
5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall
promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following
actions:
7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the
Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the
Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and
the basis for challenging any amounts that are
disputed; and
7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed
amounts.
7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations
under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to
constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or
Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim,
except as to undisputed amounts for which the
Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If,
however, the Surety fails to discharge its
obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety
shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable
attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to
recover any sums found to be due and owing to
the Claimant.
8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount
of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s
fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this
Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good
faith by the Surety.
9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the
Construction Contract shall be used for the performance
of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any,
under any construction performance bond. By the
Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond,
they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the
performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated
to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under
this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds
for the completion of the work.
10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or
others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated
to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be
liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any
Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond
no obligation to make payments to or give notice on
behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to
Claimants under this Bond.
11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including
changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond
Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 4 of 3
12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under
this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in
the state in which the project that is the subject of the
Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of
one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a
Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or
(2) on which the last labor or service was performed by
anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished
by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of
(1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph
are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of
limitation available to sureties as a defense in the
jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the
Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address
shown on the page on which their signature appears.
Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished,
shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.
14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a
statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the construction was to be performed, any provision in
this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal
requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and
provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal
requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When
so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed
as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a
potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and
Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall
permit a copy to be made.
16. Definitions
16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant
including at a minimum:
1. The name of the Claimant;
2. The name of the person for whom the labor
was done, or materials or equipment
furnished;
3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order
pursuant to which labor, materials, or
equipment was furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract;
4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or
equipment furnished;
5. The date on which the Claimant last
performed labor or last furnished materials or
equipment for use in the performance of the
Construction Contract;
6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for
labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of
the date of the Claim;
7. The total amount of previous payments
received by the Claimant; and
8. The total amount due and unpaid to the
Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment
furnished as of the date of the Claim.
16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct
contract with the Contractor or with a
subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor,
materials, or equipment for use in the performance
of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant
also includes any individual or entity that has
rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable
mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real
property upon which the Project is located. The
intent of this Bond shall be to include without
limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or
equipment” that part of the water, gas, power,
light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or
rental equipment used in the Construction
Contract, architectural and engineering services
required for performance of the work of the
Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors,
and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may
be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor,
materials, or equipment were furnished.
16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between
the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover
page, including all Contract Documents and all
changes made to the agreement and the Contract
Documents.
16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has
not been remedied or waived, to pay the
Contractor as required under the Construction
Contract or to perform and complete or comply
with the other material terms of the Construction
Contract.
16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that
comprise the agreement between the Owner and
Contractor.
17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a
contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this
Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term
Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.
18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:
Contractor's Application for Payment No.
Application Application Date:
Period:
To From (Contractor): Via (Engineer):
(Owner):
Project: Contract:
Owner's Contract No.: Contractor's Project No.: Engineer's Project No.:
1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE...........................................................................$
2. Net change by Change Orders......................................................................................$
3. Current Contract Price (Line 1 ± 2)................................................................................................$
4. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE
(Column F total on Progress Estimates).............................................................................................................$
5. RETAINAGE:
a. X Work Completed..............................................$
b. X Stored Material..............................................$
c. Total Retainage (Line 5.a + Line 5.b).........................................................................................................................................$
6. AMOUNT ELIGIBLE TO DATE (Line 4 - Line 5.c)....................................................................................................................$
7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS (Line 6 from prior Application).........................................................................................................$
8. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION....................................................................................................................................$
9. BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETAINAGE
(Column G total on Progress Estimates + Line 5.c above).....................................................................................................$
Contractor's Certification
Payment of: $
is recommended by:
Payment of: $
is approved by:
Contractor Signature
By: Date: Approved by:
NET CHANGE BY
CHANGE ORDERS
TOTALS
(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)
(Date)
Funding or Financing Entity (if applicable)
(Owner)
(Date)
(Date)(Engineer)
Change Order Summary
Number Deductions
Approved Change Orders
(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)
Application For Payment
Baskerville-Donovan, Inc.
Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim
Project
Wakulla County
111803.1
Additions
The undersigned Contractor certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following:
(1) All previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract
have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection
with the Work covered by prior Applications for Payment;
(2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or
covered by this Application for Payment, will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all
Liens, security interests, and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to Owner
indemnifying Owner against any such Liens, security interest, or encumbrances); and
(3) All the Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents
and is not defective.
EJCDC® C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
© 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 4
Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work
For (Contract): Application Number:
Application Period: Application Date:
B C D Materials Presently Total Completed Balance to Finish
Stored (not in C or D) and Stored to Date (B - F)
(C + D + E)
Contractor's Application
Totals
%
(F / B)
GE
Scheduled Value ($)Description
A
This Period
FWork Completed
From Previous Application
(C+D)
Specification Section
No.
EJCDC® C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
© 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 4
Progress Estimate - Unit Price Work Contractor's Application
For (Contract): Application Number:
Application Period: Application Date:
Totals
%
(F / B) Description
Materials Presently
Stored (not in C)
Total Completed
and Stored to Date
(D + E)
Balance to Finish
(B - F)
Estimated
Quantity
Installed
Value of Work
Installed to
Date
Contract Information
Item
QuantityUnits Unit Price
Total Value
of Item ($)
Item
Bid Item No.
A B C D E F
EJCDC® C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
© 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 4
Stored Material Summary Contractor's Application
For (Contract): Application Number:
Application Period: Application Date:
B E G
Totals
D F
Materials Remaining
in Storage ($)
(D + E - F)
Amount Stored
this Month ($)
Subtotal Amount
Completed and
Stored to Date
(D + E)
Stored Previously Incorporated in Work
Date Placed
into Storage
(Month/Year)
Amount
($)
Date (Month/
Year)
Amount
($)
Supplier
Invoice No.
Submittal No.
(with
Specification
Section No.)
A C
Bid
Item
No.
Storage
LocationDescription of Materials or Equipment Stored
EJCDC® C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
© 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 4
EJCDC® C-941, Change Order.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2
Change Order No.
Date of Issuance: Effective Date:
Owner: Wakulla County Owner's Contract No.:
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Engineer: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Engineer's Project No.: 111803.10
Project: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim
Project
Contract Name:
The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:
Description:
Attachments: [List documents supporting change]
CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES
[note changes in Milestones if applicable]
Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change
Orders No. to No. :
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change
Orders No. to No. :
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days
Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED:
By: By: By:
Engineer (if required) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)
Title: Title
: Title
:
Date: Date
:
Date
:
Approved by Funding Agency (if
applicable)
By: Date:
Title:
EJCDC® C-941, Change Order.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 2 of 2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
EJCDC® C-550, Notice to Proceed.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Owner: Wakulla County Board of County
Commissioners
Owner's Contract No.:
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Engineer: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Engineer's Project No.: 111803.10
Project: Wakulla County
Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment
Plant Interim Project
Contract Name:
Effective Date of Contract:
TO CONTRACTOR:
Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on
[_____________________, 20__]. [see Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions]
On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work shall be
done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement, [the date of Substantial Completion is
________________________, and the date of readiness for final payment is_____________________] or [the
number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is _____________________, and the number of days to
achieve readiness for final payment is _____________________].
Before starting any Work at the Site, Contractor must comply with the following:
[Note any access limitations, security procedures, or other restrictions]
Owner:
Authorized Signature
By:
Title:
Date Issued:
Copy: Engineer
EJCDC® C-550, Notice to Proceed.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 2 of 2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
EJCDC® C-625, Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Owner: Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners Owner's Contract No.:
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Engineer: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Engineer's Project No.: 111803.10
Project: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim
Project
Contract Name:
This [preliminary] [final] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:
All Work The following specified portions of the Work:
Date of Substantial Completion
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and
Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or portion thereof
designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion.
The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the
contractual correction period and applicable warranties required by the Contract.
A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-inclusive, and
the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in
accordance with the Contract.
The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities,
insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work shall be as provided in the Contract, except as
amended as follows: [Note: Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product
of mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions.]
Amendments to Owner's
responsibilities: None
As follows
Amendments to
Contractor's responsibilities: None
As follows:
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: [punch list; others]
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a
release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract.
EXECUTED BY ENGINEER: RECEIVED: RECEIVED:
By: By: By:
(Authorized signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)
Title: Title: Title:
Date: Date: Date:
EJCDC® C-625, Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 2 of 2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
USDA Form Approved
Form RD 400-6 OMB No.0575-0018
(Rev.4-00) COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This statement relates to a proposed contract with
WAKULLA COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS
(Name of borrower or grantee)
Who expects to finance the contract with assistance from either the Rural Housing Service (RHS),
Rural Business-Cooperative Service (RBS), or the Rural Utilities Service (RUS) or their successor
agencies, United State Department of Agriculture (whether by a loan, grant, loan insurance,
guarantee, or other form of financial assistance). I am the undersigned bidder or prospective
contractor, I represent that:
1. I have, have not, participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to Executive
Oder 11246 (regarding equal employment opportunity) or a preceding similar Executive Order.
2. If I have participated in such a contract or subcontract, I have, have not filed all
compliance reports that have been required to file in connection with the contract or subcontract.
If the proposed contract is for $50,000 or more and I have 50 or more employees, I also represent that:
3. I have, have not previously had contracts subject to the written affirmative action
programs requirements of the Secretary of Labor.
4. If I have participated in such a contract or subcontract, I have, have not developed and
placed on file at each establishment affirmative action programs as required by the rules and
regulations of the Secretary of Labor.
I understand that if I have failed to file any compliance reports that have been required of me, I am not
eligible and will not be eligible to have my bid considered or to enter into the proposed contract unless and
until I make an arrangement regarding such reports that is satisfactory to either the RHS, RBS or RUS, or
to the office where the reports are required to be filed.
I also certify that I do not maintain or provide for my employees any segregated facilities at any of my
establishments, and that I do not permit my employees to perform their services at any location, under my
control, where segregated facilities are maintained. I certify further that I will not maintain or provide for my
employees any segregated facilities at any of my establishments, and that I will not permit my employees to
perform their services at any location, under my control, where segregated facilities are maintained. I agree
that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in my contract. As used in
this certification, the term “segregated facilities” means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and wash
rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas,
parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities
provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of
race, creed, color, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. I further agree that (except
where I have obtained identical certifications for proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) I will
obtain identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontractors exceeding
$10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause; that I will retain such
certifications in my files; and that I will forward the following notice to such proposed subcontractors
(except where the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods):
(See Reverse).
According to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, an agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to a collection of
information unless it displays the valid OMB control number. The valid OMB control number for this information collection is 0575-0018. The time
required to complete this information collection is estimated to average 10 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching
existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information.
RD 400-6 (Rev. 4-00)
Position 6
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENTS FOR
CERTIFICATIONS OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES
A certification of Nonsegregated Facilities, as required by the May 9, 1967, order (32F.R. 7439, May 19, 1967)
on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor, must be submitted prior to the award of a
subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. The
certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly,
semiannually, or annually).
NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.
Date
(Signature of Bidder or Prospective Contractor)
Address (including Zip Code)
• U.S.GPO:2000-555-008/86536
Form AD-1048 (1/92)
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION – LOWER TIER COVERED TRANSACTIONS
This certification is required by the regulations implementing Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, 7 CFR Pat 3017, Section 3017.510, Participants’ responsibilities. The regulations were published as Part IV of the January 30, 1989, Federal Register (pages 4722-4733). Copies of the regulations may be obtained by contacting the Department of Agriculture agency with which this transaction originated.
(BEFORE COMPLETING CERTIFICATION, READ INSTRUCTION ON REVERSE)
(1) The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency.
(2) Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.
Organization PR/Award Number or Project Name
Name(s) and Title(s) or Authorized Representative(s)
Signature(s) Date
Form AD-1048 (1/92)
Instructions for Certification
1. By signing and submitting this form, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the certification set out on the reverse side in accordance with these instructions.
2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later than determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.
3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.
4. The terms “covered transactions,” “debarred,” “suspended,” “ineligible,”, “lower tier covered transactions,” “participant,” “person,” “primary covered transaction,” “principal,” “proposal,” and “voluntarily excluded,” as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations.
5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this form that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated.
6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this form that it will include this clause titled “Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Lower Tier Covered Transaction,” without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitation for lower tier covered transaction.
7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Non-procurement List.
8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.
9. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.
RD Instruction 1940-Q Exhibit A-1
CERTIFICATION FOR CONTRACTS, GRANTS AND LOANS
The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: 1. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by
or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an office or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant or Federal loan, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant or loan.
2. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been
paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant or loan, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form – LLL, “Disclosure of Lobbying Activities,” in accordance with its instructions.
3. The undersigned shall require that the language of this
certification be included in the award documents for all sub-awards at all tiers (including contracts, subcontractors, and sub-grants under grants and loans) and that all sub-recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.
This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
(Name) (Date)
(Title)
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
OTTER CREEK WWTP INTERIM PROJECT
Sponsor / Developer: WAKULLA COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS 3093 Crawfordville Hwy. Crawfordville, Florida, 32326
Engineer: BASKERVILLE-DONOVAN, INC. 449 W. Main St. Pensacola, Florida, 32502
Contractor:
Donald Trump, President of the United States Sony Perdue, Secretary of Agriculture
RUS Bulletin 1780-26
Exhibit I
Page 1
CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY AND AGNCY CONCURRENCE
CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY
PROJECT NAME: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY (WWTF)
INTERIM PROJECT
CONTRACTOR NAME: ________________________________
I, the undersigned, ___________________________________, the duly authorized and acting
legal representative of Wakulla County, do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the
attached Contract(s) and performance and payment bond(s) and the manner of execution thereof,
and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements is adequate and has been duly
executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that
said representatives have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the
respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally
binding obligations upon the parties executing the same in accordance with the terms,
conditions, and provisions thereof.
_______________________________
Name Date
AGENCY CONCURRENCE
As lender or insurer of funds to defray the costs of this Contract, and without liability for
any payments thereunder, the Agency hereby concurs in the form, content, and execution of
this Agreement.
Agency Representative Date
Name
RUS Bulletin 1780-26
Attachment H
Page 2
00800-2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
RUS Bulletin 1780-26
Exhibit J
Page 1
00800-1
ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATION OF FINAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT NAME: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT (WWTF)
INTERIM PROJECT
The final Drawings and Specifications, other assembled Construction Contract Documents,
bidding-related documents (or requests for proposals or other construction procurement
documents), and any other Final Design Phase deliverables, comply with all requirements of the
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service, to the best of my knowledge and
professional judgment.
If the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) documents have been used, all
modifications required by RUS Bulletin 1780-26 have been made in accordance with the terms of
the license agreement, which states in part that the Engineer “must plainly show all changes to the
Standard EJCDC Test, using “Track Changes’ (redline/strikeout), highlighting, or other means of
clearly indicating additions and deletions.” Such other means may include attachments indicating
changes (e.g. Supplementary Conditions modifying the General Conditions).
_________________________________
Environmental Engineer Date
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
Name and Title
_________________________________
Electrical Engineer Date
James Tatone, P.E.
_________________________________
Civil Engineer Date
Michael Langston, P.E.
Name and Title
RUS Bulletin 1780-26
Exhibit J
Page 2
00800-2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Work by Owner.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Access to site.
6. Coordination with occupants.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification and drawing conventions.
9. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Wakulla County Otter Creek Waste Water Treatment Facility (WWTF)
Interim.
1. Project Location: 2146 Lawhon Mill Road Crawfordville, FL 32327.
B. Owner: Wakulla County.
1. Owner's Representative: Ned Nobles.
C. Engineer of Record: T. Keith Hill, PE
Project Manager: Richard W. Delp, CSI-CDT
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. This project consists of by-pass piping around the filters, upgrades to the in-plant pump
station, installation of an auger screen for the septage receiving station, installation of
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2
valve actuators, and electrical and integration work as indicated on the drawings or in the
contract documents that will result in a complete and operational system.
B. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
a. Otter Creek WWTF Interim Project.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this
Contract with work performed by Owner.
1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.
Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.7 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas as shown on drawings indicated. Do not
disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas as shown on contract drawings.
2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction
operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to
Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with
completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited
Owner occupancy.
3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of Work.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of Work.
1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the facility to normal business working hours of 6:00 a.m.
to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Obtain Engineer’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
2. Obtain Engineer’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4
F. Employee Identification: Provide identification Employee Roster Badges for Contractor
personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.
G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of
Contractor personnel working on Project site.
1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.
1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of
the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1
SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of Engineers and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Owner’s Change Order, Owner’s Work Change Directive,
or Engineer's Field Order for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received
within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered
or rejected at discretion of Engineer.
1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 4
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1
SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy
requirements for the schedule of values.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later than seven
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each
phase of payment.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2
4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction
schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values
coordinated with each element.
5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design
professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment
requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design
services contract as described in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Engineer.
c. Engineer's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of EJCDC Document C-620.
3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-
hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts
in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project
closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and
subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
include evidence of insurance.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each
purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments
or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.
10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Engineer by the 7th of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last
day of the month.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by
Engineer.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Engineer and Owner for Applications
for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,
whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at
time of Application for Payment.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 4
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project
acceleration.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items
stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application
for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and
remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of
lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from
every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 5
4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating
Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.
6. Products list (preliminary if not final).
7. Sustainable design action plans.
8. Schedule of unit prices.
9. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
10. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
11. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
12. Copies of building permits.
13. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
14. Initial progress report.
15. Report of preconstruction conference.
16. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
17. Performance and payment bonds.
18. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously
for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
4. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request to Engineer from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of
the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A r approved equivalent. Include the following information in
tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Contractor shall have employees complete Wakulla County ID Badge
process before starting construction operations. Submit a list of key personnel assignments,
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2
including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals
and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home,
office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned
to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.
b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings
by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the
information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before
submitting for review.
c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
f. Indicate required installation sequences.
g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Engineer indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows (where
applicable):
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-
alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
9. Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Engineer determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Engineer will so inform
Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."
C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the
following requirements:
1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating
system as original Drawings.
2. File Preparation Format: DWG Autocad, operating in Microsoft Windows operating
system.
3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File
(PDF) format.
4. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in
preparing coordination digital data files.
a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data files as they relate to Drawings.
b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Autocad.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Engineer.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's narrative statement of requested information of problem statement.
12. Contractor's suggested resolution for problem statements. If Contractor's suggested
resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact
in the RFI.
13. Contractor's signature.
14. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Engineer.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven working days for Engineer’s response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer
after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Engineer in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
b. Engineer’s RFI response shall not be construed as authorization of actions
requiring a contract cost or time change. Such Authorization is reserved to the
Owner.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log monthly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Engineer.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Engineer’s response was received.
F. On receipt of Engineer’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1. Identification of the need for a related Engineer’s Field Order, Owner’s Work Change
Directive, or a Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Engineer of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 7
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Engineer, within seven days of the
meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference
before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Contractor, but no later than 15
days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
l. Sustainable design requirements.
m. Preparation of record documents.
n. Use of the premises and existing building.
o. Work restrictions.
p. Working hours.
q. Owner's occupancy requirements.
r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
s. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
u. Construction waste management and recycling.
v. Parking availability.
w. Office, work, and storage areas.
x. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
y. First aid.
z. Security.
aa. Progress cleaning.
4. Minutes: Engineer will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Contractor shall conduct any required preinstallation conferences
at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other
construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 8
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Engineer
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Sustainable design requirements.
i. Review of mockups.
j. Possible conflicts.
k. Compatibility requirements.
l. Time schedules.
m. Weather limitations.
n. Manufacturer's written instructions.
o. Warranty requirements.
p. Compatibility of materials.
q. Acceptability of substrates.
r. Temporary facilities and controls.
s. Space and access limitations.
t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
u. Testing and inspecting requirements.
v. Installation procedures.
w. Coordination with other work.
x. Required performance results.
y. Protection of adjacent work.
z. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Engineer shall schedule and conduct a project closeout
conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Contractor, but no later than 30 days prior to the
scheduled date of Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project
and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 9
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents.
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.
e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
g. Requirements for demonstration and training.
h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Coordination of separate contracts.
l. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
E. Progress Meetings: Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Identify whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule Identify how construction behind
schedule will be expedited and if commitments from parties involved to do so have
been secure. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current
and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.
4) Status of submittals.
5) Status of sustainable design documentation.
6) Deliveries.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 10
7) Off-site fabrication.
8) Access.
9) Site utilization.
10) Temporary facilities and controls.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) Status of RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
21) Record Drawings
4. Minutes: Contractor is responsible for conducting the meeting, recording and distributing
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
F. Contractor’s Cooordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular
intervals in advance of and in preparation for the Project Progress Meetings. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1. Attendees: Include each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned
with current progress exclusive of the Owner and Engineer’s representatives. Also those
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction
schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each
coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 11
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.
4) Status of submittals.
5) Deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization.
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Work hours.
11) Hazards and risks.
12) Progress cleaning.
13) Quality and work standards.
14) Change Orders.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting exclusive of the
Owner and Engineer’s representatives. Include in the Progress Meetings the reporting of
relavant componnets of the Coodination Meetings to the Owner and Engineer’s
representatives.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1
SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Startup construction schedule.
2. Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Construction schedule updating reports.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Site condition reports.
7. Special reports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise
approved by Engineer.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
3. Three paper copies.
B. Startup construction schedule.
1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of
schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)
and date on label.
E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed
until most recent Application for Payment.
F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and
reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Engineer's
request.
B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages area separations interim milestones
and partial Owner occupancy.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including
commissioning activities.
10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final
completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless
specifically allowed by Engineer.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. Major pieces of equipment.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Engineer’s administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 60 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5
5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Building flush-out.
m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
c. Permanent space enclosure.
d. Completion of mechanical installation.
e. Completion of electrical installation.
f. Substantial Completion.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.
On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and
actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1. See Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6
F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by
which recovery will be accomplished.
H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within 14
days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (see special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Work Change Directives received and implemented.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 7
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.
2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project
site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain
of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or
effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are
known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 8
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 1
SECTION 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittals.
B. Quality assurance.
C. Format for network analysis schedules.
D. Network analysis schedules.
E. Bar chart schedules.
F. Review and evaluation.
G. Updating schedules.
H. Distribution.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit proposed preliminary work
schedule defining planned operations for first 60 days of Work, with general outline for
remainder of Work.
B. Participate in review of preliminary and complete work schedule jointly with Engineer.
C. Within 20 days after joint review of proposed preliminary work schedule, submit draft of
proposed complete work schedule for review. Include written certification that major mechanical
and electrical Subcontractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule.
D. Submit updated work schedules every 30 days.
E. Submit work schedules under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
F. Schedule Updates:
1. Overall percent complete, projected and actual.
2. Completion progress by listed activity and subactivity, to within five working days prior to
submittal.
3. Changes in Work scope and activities modified since submittal.
4. Delays in submittals or resubmittals, deliveries, or Work.
5. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work.
6. Other identifiable changes.
7. Revised projections of progress and completion.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 2
G. Narrative Progress Report:
1. Submit with each monthly submission of Progress Schedule.
2. Summary of Work completed during the past period between reports.
3. Work planned during the next period.
4. Explanation of differences between summary of Work completed and Work planned in
previously submitted report.
5. Current and anticipated delaying factors and estimated impact on other activities and
completion milestones.
6. Corrective action taken or proposed.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel specializing in CPM scheduling with two years' minimum
experience in scheduling construction work of complexity comparable to the Project.
1.4 BAR CHART SCHEDULES
A. Format: Bar chart Schedule, to include at least:
1. Identification and listing in chronological order of those activities reasonably required to
complete the Work, including:
a. Subcontract Work.
b. Major equipment design, fabrication, factory testing, and delivery dates including
required lead times.
c. Move-in and other preliminary activities.
d. Equipment and equipment system test and startup activities.
e. Project closeout and cleanup.
f. Work sequences, constraints, and milestones.
2. Listings identified by Specification Section number.
3. Identification of the following:
a. Horizontal time frame by year, month, and week.
b. Duration, early start, and completion for each activity and subactivity.
c. Critical activities and Project float.
d. Subschedules to further define critical portions of Work.
1.5 REVIEW AND EVALUATION
A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedules with Architect/Engineer at each submittal.
B. Evaluate Project status to determine Work behind schedule and Work ahead of schedule.
C. After review, revise schedules incorporating results of review, and resubmit within 10 days.
1.6 UPDATING SCHEDULES
A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 3
B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each
activity. Update schedules to depict current status of Work.
C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other
identifiable changes.
D. Upon approval of a Change Order, include the change in the next schedule submittal.
E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F. Submit sorts as required to support recommended changes.
G. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule.
Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including effects of changes on
schedules of separate Contractors.
1.7 DISTRIBUTION
A. Following joint review, distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's Project site file, to
Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect/Engineer, Owner, and other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in
schedules.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used
END OF SECTION 01 32 16
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 4
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1
SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final completion construction photographs.
4. Web-based construction photographic documentation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.
2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as
project record documents at Project closeout.
3. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation
before selective demolition operations commence.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Costs: Photographic documentation services shall be considered incidental to each bid item and
are therefore included in each item.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For photographer.
B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked
for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Indicate elevation or story of
construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.
C. Digital Photographs: Submit dated image files with each pay application.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.
2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio
as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph,
accompanied by key plan file.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 2
3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Date photograph was taken.
c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
d. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
D. Video Recordings: Video recordings are recommended but not required.
1. Submit video recordings in digital video disc format acceptable to Engineer. Video
recording should make every effort to capture all aspects of the construction site.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has regularly engaged as a photographer of
construction projects for not less than three years.
1.6 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner and Engineer for
unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum
sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 3
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project
site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those
submitted to Engineer.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and
surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different
vantage points, as directed by Engineer.
1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
2. Take a minimum of 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property
before starting the Work.
3. Take a minimum of 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property
to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.
4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent
structures, pavements, and improvements.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 20 photographs monthly, coinciding
with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to
show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. Pay particular
attention to record major features to be concealed or buried including piping junctions, major
fittings existing piping configurations, encountered conflicts and area of significant congestion.
F. Engineer-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Engineer will instruct
photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage
points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and
progress since last photographs were taken.
G. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 20 photographs as
indicated, to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
1. Frequency: Take photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with
the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.
2. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Engineer and Contractor, photographer to
select vantage points. During each of the following construction phases, take not less than
two of the required shots from identical vantage point each time to create a time-lapse
sequence as follows:
a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction.
b. Above-grade structural framing.
c. Exterior building enclosure.
d. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion.
H. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 20 color photographs after
date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Engineer will
inform photographer of desired vantage points.
1. Do not include date stamp.
I. Additional Photographs: Engineer may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs
specified. .
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 4
1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.
2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Special events planned at Project site.
b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.
c. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
d. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
e. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.
END OF SECTION 01 32 33
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
schedule of values.
2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
5. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Engineer's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and
from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet
protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within
which internal and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in
Autocad.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Engineer's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted simultaneously to Engineer and to Engineer's consultants, allow 15
days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Engineer before being
returned to Contractor.
D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Engineer.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Other necessary identification.
4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified
number of copies to Engineer.
5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Engineer
will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the
following information:
1) Project name.
2) Date.
3) Destination (To:).
4) Source (From:).
5) Name and address of Engineer.
6) Name of Contractor.
7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
9) Category and type of submittal.
10) Submittal purpose and description.
11) Specification Section number and title.
12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
14) Indication of full or partial submittal.
15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
17) Remarks.
18) Signature of transmitter.
E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Engineer.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Engineer.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Category and type of submittal.
i. Submittal purpose and description.
j. Specification Section number and title.
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n. Related physical samples submitted directly.
o. Indication of full or partial submittal.
p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
r. Other necessary identification.
s. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.
G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested
by Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract
Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information
as related submittal.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action
stamp.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Engineer's FTP site
specifically established for Project.
a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
3. Action Submittals: Submit Five paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Engineer will return one copy.
4. Informational Submittals: Submit five paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Engineer will not return copies.
5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Five paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return
one copy.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based on Engineer's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Three opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Engineer will return one copy(ies).
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8
c. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Engineer will retain one copy; remainder
will be returned.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Engineer will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a project record sample.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Engineer
will return two copies.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 10
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 11
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Engineer.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit five paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible
design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be
designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 12
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Engineer.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Engineer without
action.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Engineer.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2
1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and
subassemblies.
3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and
ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and
equipment, and lighting.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
responsibilities.
B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-
resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,
and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to
Engineer. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4
used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate
with Contractor's construction schedule.
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work
requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and
inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during
construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and
inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into
compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Engineer has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do
not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal
Procedures."
D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 9
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-
control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.
Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Engineer, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as
follows:
B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Engineer with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas
and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 01 73 00 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion
construction photographic documentation.
2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
3. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer's signature
for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.
7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in
Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment
Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit consent of surety.
5. Submit final liquidation damages settlement statement, acceptable to OWNER. 6. Completion of project closeout requirements.
7. Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial completion
(regardless of whether special payment application was previously made).
8. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be settled and that work not
actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay.
9. Proof satisfactory to Owner that taxes, fees, and similar obligations of Contractor have
been paid.
10. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar
provisions.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Engineer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.
b. PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.
c. Three paper copies. Engineer will return two copies.
1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 6
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.
Provide written report on completion of cleaning.
p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 7
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 8
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2
1. PDF electronic file in searchable format. Assemble each manual into a composite
electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer. Provide 3
CD’s.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose
title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Engineer will return one copy.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing
demonstration and training. Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of
manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Engineer will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
2. Only originals of manufacturer’s data sheets shall be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance
data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired
information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance
manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Engineer.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names
used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and
subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4
that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily
navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening
file.
F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, 3” maximum, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in
thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate
volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation
or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or
schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only
sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 8
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39
"Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01 78 23
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked-up record prints.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal:
1) Submit two paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.
2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.
3) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots.
4) Engineer will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
b. Final Submittal:
1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.
2) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file
plots.
3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information
were recorded.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files of Project's
Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories
of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record
documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions,
field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one complete set of the contract drawings, marked to show changes.
The contractor will maintain “Working” drawings throughout the progress of the work.
Drawings shall be a “living” record of all approved changes to the construction documents as
the work progresses. Additionally, drawings shall include both horizontal and vertical
references with three (3) tie dimensions to visible permanent physical features for all building
corner, structures, laterals valves and pipe appurtenances, and location of water mains and force
mains with respect to the centerline of adjacent roads with depth below grade.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of encountered existing and constructed underground
utilities.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. For pile lines, conduits and other buried components, alternatively to collection of reference
distances, maintain a digital file of x, y, and z coordinates of all constructed components along with identifying descriptors with each point. Incorporate digital point information into final record drawing digital data files.
C. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Engineer. When authorized, prepare a full set
of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
2. Format: DWG, Version , Microsoft Windows operating system.
3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for resolution.
6. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of
Engineer's digital data files.
b. Engineer will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate
layers.
D. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings
where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are
suitable to show actual installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting
an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4
2. Consult Engineer for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly
prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for
formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
E. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on
cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Engineer.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy or scanned
PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 5
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy or scanned
PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1
SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B. Costs for demonstration and training shall be considered incidental and shall be included in line
item bid amounts for each respective component where training is required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
B. Qualification Data: For instructor.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared
and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
B. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
3. Review required content of instruction.
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions
and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 3
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 4
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Engineer will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 5
D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
END OF SECTION 01 79 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated
to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,
prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise
indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control
and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,
including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition
operations. Comply with Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work
begins.
F. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so
as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Notify warrantor on
completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has
been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and
hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing
conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building
demolition operations.
D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs or video.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation."
2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
salvage operations.
3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas
to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material and leave in place.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material and leave in place.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and
finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least one hour after flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and
remove.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved
construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 7
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 8
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 1
SECTION 03 30 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of fly ash,
slag cement, and other pozzolans.
B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR: For products having recycled content, documentation
indication percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-
mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 2
1. "General Requirements."
2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories."
3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports."
4. "Concrete Mixtures."
5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."
B. Comply with ACI 117.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064, as drawn.
D. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
E. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, flat sheet.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer throughout the project.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: C 150M, Type II.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.
F. Water: ASTM C 94.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Vapor Retarder: Plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A or B.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 3
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Comply with ACI 301.
B. Normal-Weight Concrete:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of
trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position
with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 4
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive or joint tape.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 5
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth-formed-
finished as-cast concrete where indicated:
1. Smooth-rubbed finish.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or
darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleed
water appears on surface.
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or
direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling,
to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either
thickset or thinset methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still
plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Slip-Resistive Broom Finish: Apply a slip-resistive finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior
concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen
trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 6
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material
and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
END OF SECTION 03 30 53
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 1
SECTION 09 96 36 - CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER
FACILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Field application of chemical-resistant coatings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to ASTM D16 for definitions of terms used in this Section.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications.
2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood
and Wood-Base Materials.
3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
B. Master Painters Institute:
1. MPI - Approved Products List.
C. NSF International:
1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
D. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1. SSPC-PA 2 - Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness
Requirements.
2. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
3. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning.
4. SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.
E. NAPF: National Association of Pipe Fabricators
1. NAPF 500-03
a. 500-03-04 - Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 2
b. 500-03-05 - Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.5 SEQUENCING
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer data on coatings.
2. Include MPI - Approved Products Lists with proposed products highlighted.
C. Samples:
1. Submit two paper chip samples, illustrating range of colors and textures available for each
surface finishing product as scheduled.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions
requiring special attention, and.
F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
G. Qualifications Statements:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and applicator.
2. Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information on cleaning, touchup, and repair of coated
surfaces.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 3
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Extra Stock Materials:
1. Furnish 1 gal. of each color, type, and surface texture as provided for Project.
2. Label each container with manufacturer's label, color, type, texture, room number and Site
location.
3. Store where directed by Owner.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics:
1. Fire-Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed index when
tested according to ASTM E84.
C. Perform Work according to Wakulla standards.
D. Maintain 1 copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Container Labeling: Include manufacturer's name, type of coating, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
B. Inspection:
1. Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers.
2. Inspect for damage and to verify acceptability.
C. Store materials in ventilated area and otherwise according to manufacturer instructions.
D. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from
construction operations areas.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 4
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.12 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition
control facilities for product storage and installation.
B. Storage Conditions:
1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 45 degrees F.
2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 90 degrees F
C. Application Conditions:
1. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature
ranges required by coating manufacturer.
2. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, when relative humidity is outside
humidity ranges, or when moisture content of surfaces exceeds those required by coating
manufacturer.
3. Lighting Level: 80fcmeasured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for coatings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATORS
A. Applicators shall be approved by coating manufacturer.
2.2 COATINGS
A. Materials:
1. Coatings:
a. Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings.
b. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Accessories:
a. Grade: Industrial
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 5
b. Thinners.
c. Other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve specified finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as recommended by
product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of Work, and report
conditions capable of affecting proper application to Engineer.
C. Test or verify with manufacturer that shop-applied primer is compatible with subsequent cover
materials.
D. Moisture Content:
1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter.
2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below maximum recommended
by product manufacturer.
3.2 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT SCHEDULED TO BE COATED
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated from damage during surface
preparation and application of coatings.
B. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be
coated.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare coatings as follows:
1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous
coating.
2. For smooth flow and brushing properties.
B. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
C. Defects:
1. Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting Work of this Section.
2. Remove or repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 6
D. Cleaning
1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for
each particular substrate condition and as specified.
E. Impervious Surfaces:
1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach.
2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Coating:
1. Remove surface contamination by steam or high-pressure water.
2. Remove oxidation and provide a uniform profile of 1.0 mil by abrasive blasting or power
tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 11.
G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
H. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Coating:
1. Remove contamination by steam, high-pressure water, or solvent washing.
2. Remove oxidation and provide a uniform profile of 1.0 mil by abrasive blasting or power
tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 11.
I. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Natural Oxidized Finish:
1. Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium
chloride in acetic acid.
2. Rub on repeatedly for required effect, and, once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and
allow to dry.
J. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Remove surface contamination and oils, and wash with solvent.
2. Treat interior non-immersed surfaces using Great Lakes Laboratories Clean’N Etch in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s literature. Exterior galvanized or galvanized in immersion
service shall be abrasive blasted to remove all passivators nd to provide a uniform surface
profile of at least 1.0 mil.
K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces:
1. Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust.
2. Abrasive blast as follows:
a. Non-Immersion: SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
b. Immersion: SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning.
3. Clean by washing with solvent.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 7
4. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts, and nuts are
similarly cleaned.
5. Spot-prime coat after repairs.
L. Ductile or Cast Iron
1. Surfaces shall be abrasive swept blasted to removal oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose annealing
oxides, loose rust and loose mold coatings.
2. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
M. Ferrous Metal Structures and Miscellaneous Fabrications
1. General: Remove hardware, plates, and similar items already installed that are not to be
painted. Remove these items to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers
skilled in the trades involved.
1. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of sub-
stances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to
cleaning. Where indicated for blast cleaning, conform to the specified reference standard of
SSPC.
N. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces:
1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
2. Feather edges to make touchup patches inconspicuous.
3. Clean bare metal surfaces as follows:
a. Immersion Service: SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning.
b. Non-Immersion Service: SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP 11
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal”.
4. Prime bare steel surfaces prior to the formation of rust and within eight hours of surface
preparation.
O. Existing Work:
1. Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing installations and as specified.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
B. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
C. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination
D. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 8
E. Ensure coatings are applied within recoat windows as specified by manufacturer.
F. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions
G. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT. DFT shall be as
scheduled, but not less than per manufacturer recommendations.
H. Apply each coat slightly darker than preceding coat, unless specified otherwise.
I. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect
performance or appearance of coating systems
J. Stripe paint with brush critical locations on steel such as welds, corners, and edges using
specified primer or intermediate coat.
K. Cleaning:
1. Vacuum surfaces to remove loose particles.
2. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.
3. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site
L. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment:
1. Schedule of Color-Coding shall be in accordance with Wakulla standard details.
2. Coat shop-primed equipment.
3. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components, and coat separately.
4. Coat insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars and supports, and except where these items are shop finished.
5. Color-Coding:
a. Color-code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work according to indicated
requirements.
b. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.
6. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, escutcheons, and fittings that were removed prior
to finishing.
M. Monitor and ensure strict observance of manufacturer’s stated allowable recoat window. Prepare
surfaces which have exceeded the allowable exposure time in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
N. Installation Standards: Install Work according to Wakulla standards.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Services:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 9
1. Verify coatings and other materials are as specified.
2. Verify surface preparation and application are as specified.
3. Verify DFT of each coat and total DFT of each coating system are as specified using wet
film and dry film gauges.
4. Coating Defects: Check coatings for film characteristics or defects that would adversely
affect performance or appearance of coating systems.
a. Check for holidays on interior steel immersion surfaces using holiday detector.
B. Report:
1. Submit written reports describing inspections made and actions taken to correct
nonconforming work.
2. Report nonconforming work not corrected.
3. Submit copies of report to Engineer.
C. Inspecting:
1. Surface Preparation: Comply with specified reference standards of SSPC.
D. Testing:
1. Holiday Testing: Submerged surfaces including surfaces within vapor area.
2. Dry Film Thickness: Measure according to SSPC-PA 2.
E. Equipment Acceptance:
1. Repair or recoat areas containing holidays or substandard thicknesses according to coating
manufacturer instructions.
2. Retest repaired or recoated areas.
3. Materials and Surfaces Not Scheduled To Be Coated: Repair or replace damaged materials
and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.
4. Damaged Coatings: Touch-up or repair damaged coatings. Touch-up of minor damage shall
be acceptable where result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat entire
surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture, color or DFT.
5. Coating Defects: Repair in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions coatings that exhibit
film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of
coating systems.
3.6 PROTECTION OF COATING SYSTEMS
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Engineer.
B. Provide “Wet Paint” signs to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES09 96 36 - 10
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Application: Ferrous metal structures and miscellaneous fabrications.
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10.
a. Non-Immersed: SSPC-SP 6.
b. Immersed: SSPC-SP 10
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams Company.
b. Tnemec Company, Inc.
c. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.
B. Interior & Exterior Exposed (not immersed):
1. Primer:
a. Sherwin Williams Galva Pack applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 91-H2O Hydro-Zinc applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT
2. Intermediate Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 49 Multi-Purpose Epoxy applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
3. Finish Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Acrolon Ultra applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT
b. Exterior: Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT, Interior:
Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT
4. Finish Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.
C. Immersed – Wastewater:
1. Primer:
a. Sherwin Williams Galva Pack applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT
2. Stripe Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 142 Epoxoline applied at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT
3. Finish Coat:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES09 96 36 - 11
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 142 Epoxoline applied at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT
D. Application: Ductile or cast iron pipe, pumps, motors, and valves.
1. Surface Preparation:
a. Ductile Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04
b. Cast Ductile Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams Company.
b. Tnemec Company, Inc.
c. Furnish materials according to WAKULLA standards.
E. Interior and/or Exterior Exposed:
1. Primer:
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series N140-1211 Pota-Pox Plus at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT
2. Intermediate Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 48 Multi-Purpose Epoxy applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
3. Finish Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Acrolon Ultra applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT
b. Exterior: Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT, Interior:
Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT
4. Finish Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.
F. Steel pipe and equipment:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sherwin Williams Company.
b. Tnemec Company, Inc.
c. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.
G. Interior and/or Exterior Exposed:
1. Primer:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES09 96 36 - 12
a. Sherwin Williams Galva Pack applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 91-H2O Hydro-Zinc applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT
2. Intermediate Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. Tnemec Series 49 Multi-Purpose Epoxy applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
3. Finish Coat:
a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT
b. b. Exterior: Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT, Interior:
Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT
4. Finish Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.
END OF SECTION 09 96 36
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-1
SECTION 26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections
1. Division 01 – General Requirements
2. Division 26 – Electrical
3. Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Scope
1. This section includes the furnishing, installation, testing, adjusting and placing in
operation all electrical equipment, devices, facilities, materials, and auxiliary
items necessary for the complete and successful operation of all electrical
equipment as described herein, shown on the Drawings, or deemed necessary for
the satisfactory completion of the electrical Work. A comprehensive electrical
scope of work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Power/Electrical System
b. Grounding System
c. Control System
d. Connection of electrically powered mechanical equipment
e. All incidentals necessary for a complete and fully operational electrical
system
B. Coordination
1. Review installation procedures and schedules under other Specification sections
and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that must be
installed with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings, and panels.
2. The electrical design provides a number of branch circuits, ampacity and
overcurrent protection for other divisions design basis equipment conforming to
manufacturer's specifications available at time of design. The Contractor shall
verify all equipment loads prior to rough-in. If requirements of equipment
actually provided under contract for construction are different, Contractor shall
make all changes necessary without increase in the contract amount. Such
changes shall be based upon requirements, nameplate values and code
requirements, whichever is more stringent, and may include, but are not limited
to: size of conductors, size of conduit, number of conductors and conduits, type
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-2
and size of circuit breaker or disconnect, overloads, starters, variable frequency
drives, fuse protection and additional disconnect switches.
3. The electrical Contractor is required to coordinate with all process equipment
manufacturers, to provide and install for electrical and controls, all (but not
limited to) the following: circuit breakers, disconnects, starters, variable
frequency drives, control panels, equipment, devices, conduits, conductors, etc.
As required to provide a fully operational and code compliant electrical system.
This may include the addition of electrical items not shown on the electrical plans,
but required for system operation.
C. Interpretation of Drawings
1. Dimensions on Drawings related to equipment are based on equipment of certain
manufacturers. Conform the dimensions of equipment furnished to space
allocated to the equipment.
2. Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical work and are not intended
as detailed working drawings for the electrical Work. Drawings supplement and
complement the Specifications relative to principal features of electrical systems.
3. Equipment and devices furnished and installed under this Contract shall be
properly connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices for
successful operation of complete systems, whether or not all connections and
interconnections are specifically mentioned or shown in the Contract Documents.
4. Similar products shall be from the same manufacturer for uniformity.
5. Drawings are provided for Contractor’s guidance in fulfilling the operational
intent of the Contract Documents.
6. The Contractor is required to read all other equipment specifications contained in
these Contract Documents and provide required power and control conductors for
proper function as described.
D. Working Clearances
1. Working clearances around equipment requiring electrical services shall be
verified by Contractor to comply with Code requirements. Should there be
apparent violations of clearances; the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before
proceeding with connection or placing of equipment.
2. In the case of panelboards, safety switches and other equipment requiring wire
and cable terminations, the Contractor shall ascertain that lug sizes and wiring
gutters or space allowed for proper accommodation and termination of the wires
and cables are adequate.
3. Working space for all electrical and control equipment operating at 600v volts or
less to ground and likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or
maintenance while energized shall comply with NEC Article 110.26.
E. Workmanship
1. Workmanship under this Division shall be accomplished by persons skilled in the
performance of the required task. All work shall be done in keeping with
conventions of the trade. Work of this Division shall be closely coordinated with
work of other trades to avoid conflict and interference.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-3
F. Work Included in This Contract but Specified Elsewhere:
1. Excavation and backfilling for buried electrical Work shall conform to Division
31, Earthwork.
2. Concrete for pads, manholes, ductbanks, and conduit encasement shall conform to
Division 3, Concrete.
3. Shop painting and surface preparation shall conform to Division 09, Finishes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 00, Submittal Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Submit Shop Drawings for each Specification section as a single submittal.
C. Review of equipment submittals does not relieve Contractor of their contractual
responsibility to provide complete and successfully operating systems.
D. Shop Drawings shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the
particular item:
1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.
2. Electrical ratings.
3. Conformance to applicable standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA,
IEEE, ISA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations.
4. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations, and panel layouts showing means for
mounting, conduit connection, and grounding.
5. Materials and finish specifications, including paints.
6. List of components including manufacturer’s names and catalog numbers.
7. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to components
and numbered terminals for external connections.
E. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment tests
1. Submit operating test procedures and results for equipment.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the following Sections for additional requirements.
1. Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures
2. Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data
3. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-4
B. General
1. The Contractor shall provide detailed as-built drawings for the project indicating
all power wiring.
2. Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner in AutoCAD 2019 Format.
3. The as-built drawings shall include detailed drawings of all duct banks,
underground conduit, above ground conduit, motor control centers, PLC control
panels, and control drawings. These drawings shall indicate exact location of all
underground electrical wiring and fiber optic cable.
C. Record Drawings
1. System Record Drawings: Include the following:
a. Single-line wiring diagram of the distribution system.
b. Actual, in-place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of conduit sizes
and number, and size of conductors.
c. Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the grounding system.
d. Control schematic diagrams, with terminal numbers and all control devices
identified, for all equipment.
2. Point-to-Point interconnection wiring diagram drawings: Include the following:
a. External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel, instrument, and other
devices and wiring to control stations, lighting panels, and motor
controllers.
b. Numbered terminal block identification for each wire termination.
c. Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all interconnections.
d. Identification of wiring by the conduit tag in which the wire is installed.
e. Terminal, junction, and pull boxes through which wiring is routed.
f. Identification of all equipment and the Shop Drawing transmittal number
for equipment from which the wiring requirements and termination
information was obtained.
3. The record documents shall reflect final equipment and field installation
information.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition (unless noted
otherwise) of the following codes and standards:
1. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
2. National Electrical Safety Code (NFPA 70E).
3. Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities
(NFPA 820).
B. References
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
2. IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code
3. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
4. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-5
6. IEEE – The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
7. IESNA – The Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
8. NETA – International Electrical Testing Association
C. Permits
1. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for
responsibilities relative to obtaining and paying for Contractor’s permits, licenses,
and inspection fees.
D. Testing Laboratory Labels
1. Electrical material and equipment shall be new and bear the label of Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. or other nationally recognized, independent testing laboratory,
where standards have been established and label service applies.
E. Area Classifications
1. Materials, equipment, and incidentals shall conform to the area classification(s) as
defined under NFPA 820.
2. Wet Locations: Conform to NEC and NEMA requirements for wet locations.
Enclosures in wet locations shall meet NEMA 4 requirements unless specified
otherwise.
3. Corrosive Locations: Conform to NEC and NEMA requirements for corrosive
locations. Enclosures in corrosive locations shall conform to NEMA 4X
requirements unless specified otherwise.
4. Hazardous Locations: Conform to NEC requirements for the Class and Division
designated.
5. Dusty Locations: Indoor areas not designated as hazardous, corrosive, or wet are
dusty locations. Conform to NEC and NEMA 12 requirements unless specified
otherwise.
F. Guarantee
1. The Contractor shall guarantee all other electrical systems, materials and
workmanship to be free from defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance. Contractor shall correct all defects arising within this period
upon notification by the Owner, without additional compensation.
2. The rights and/or benefits given to the Owner by the guarantees found in these
technical specifications are in addition to and not in contradiction to any rights
and/or benefits found in the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of
the Contract.
G. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to applicable sections of the Building Code and all local rules,
regulations and ordinances.
2. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70 & National Electric Safety Code.
H. Staffing
1. The Contractor shall provide a “Master Electrician” who has been deemed a
“Master Electrician” by exam through the State of Florida, or any other Florida
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-6
County Permitting Authority as the Electrical Superintendent for the project. The
Electrical Superintendent shall be on the project site any time any electrical work
is performed by the Contractor.
I. Field Quality Control
1. Conduct field quality control Work for the electrical installation. Field quality
control shall be per the requirements specified in Article 3.5 of this Section.
2. Obtain from Owner record drawings required to execute the Work.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection Of Electrical Equipment
1. Refer to Section 01 73 00, Execution, for additional protection requirements.
2. Electrical equipment shall be protected by the weather, especially from water
dripping or splashing upon it, at all times during shipment, storage and after
installation.
3. Should any apparatus be subjected to possible damage by water, it shall be
thoroughly dried and put through a dielectric test, at the expense of the
Contractor, to ascertain the suitability of this apparatus. The results of the test
shall be submitted to the Engineer and if the apparatus is found to be unsuitable,
the Contractor shall replace it without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Product Delivery, Storage, And Handling
1. Refer to Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, for additional product delivery,
storage, and handling requirements.
2. Delivery of Products: Advise Subcontractors and Suppliers of the maximum
shipping sizes of equipment that can be accommodated at the Site.
C. Existing Site Conditions
1. Examine the Site and existing facilities to compare them with the Contract
Documents relative to the conditions of the premises, location of and connection
to existing facilities, and obstructions that may affect the Work.
2. Perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a manner that will not interfere
with the existing equipment or cause interruption of the functions of the Site,
unless specified otherwise.
3. Work shall be performed with a minimum amount of disruption to the operation
of the existing facilities and Site and with prior approval of Owner. Submit for
review by Owner and Engineer a detailed written procedure for Work affecting
operation of existing facilities and Site, a detailed procedure for modifying
existing electrical equipment, and anticipated time required to complete the Work
and the required shutdown time, if any.
4. Where the Work ties in with existing installations, Contractor shall take
precautions and safeguards in connecting the Work to existing operating circuits
to prevent interruption to existing circuits. Connection of Work to existing
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-7
circuits shall be performed in the presence of Owner and Engineer. Advance
written notice is required before equipment is removed from service.
D. Staging
1. Where the Work requires certain equipment to be taken out of service, Contractor
shall perform the Work with due regard to maintenance of operations and
construction staging per Section 01 35 16, Alteration Project Procedures.
2. The level of service and control existing at the start of the Contract shall be
maintained at all times, except as required during actual change-over to new
equipment. Interruptions of existing circuits shall be coordinated with the Owner
who will determine the length of time a circuit may be de-energized to maintain
the Owner’s processes in dependable and safe operation.
1.9 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Unless specified otherwise, electrical equipment shall have ratings based on 75ºC
terminations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Field mounted control panels shall be oriented in a north/south configuration such that
the front mounted displays are not subjected to direct sun light.
B. Provide 3" concrete house-keeping pad under all floor/grade mounted electrical and
control equipment. Vertical sides and 3" around horizontal perimeter of pad shall be
painted safety yellow.
C. Electrical enclosures shall be rated as follows for the installation area, unless noted
otherwise:
1. Interior – NEMA 1
2. Exterior – NEMA 4X stainless steel
3.2 INSPECTION
A. Examine the conditions under which Work is to be performed and notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do
not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-8
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. After the electrical Work is complete, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer the
following information with his request for final inspection.
1. One set of contract drawings marked to show all significant changes in equipment
ratings and locations, alterations in locations of conduit runs, or of any data
differing from the contract drawings. This shall include revised or changed
panelboard and switchgear schedules.
2. Certificates of final inspection from local authority.
3. A tabulation of all motors listing their respective manufacturer, horsepower,
nameplate voltage and current, actual running current after installation and
overload heater rating.
B. The electrical Work shall be thoroughly tested to demonstrate that the entire system is
in proper working order and in accordance with the plans and specifications. Each
motor with its control shall be run as nearly as possible under operating conditions for a
sufficient length of time to demonstrate correct alignment, wiring capacity, speed and
satisfactory operation. All main switches and circuit breakers shall be operated, but not
necessarily at full load. Contractor may be required during final inspection, at the
request of the Engineer to furnish test instruments for use during the testing.
C. Conductor Testing
1. Refer to Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,
for testing requirements.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer when the Work is Substantially Complete that all
electrical systems and electrically operated equipment operate per the Contract
Documents and as required.
B. Perform the following operational tests:
1. Operate power circuits to verify proper operation and connection to equipment.
2. Operate control circuits including pushbuttons, indicating lights, and similar
devices to verify proper connection and function. Operate all devices, such as
pressure and flow switches and similar devices, to verify that shut-downs and
control sequences operate as required.
3. Test receptacle devices to verify proper operation and connections.
C. Provide a report on the equipment demonstration and operating tests. The report shall
include complete information on the tests performed and results.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services to interface with existing circuits. Field-determine system and
equipment requirements prior to modifying existing systems.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-9
B. Field services required shall include the following:
1. Coordinate the interface of equipment with Owner’s personnel and field
conditions.
2. Field compare existing starter and panel control circuit terminations from record
documents with the existing circuits.
3. Field-trace existing circuits as required to interface the equipment provided.
4. Field-identify terminations for starters and panel controls for follow function for
re-connection.
C. Provide tools and equipment required to trace circuits necessary for proper execution of
the Work.
D. Define and identify all wiring, circuit terminations, and equipment to be modified to
ensure the proper interface of all components. The Contract Price includes all costs
associated with field services specified for a complete and functional system.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-10
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-1
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. VFD: Variable frequency drive
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-2
1. Alpha Wire Company.
2. Belden Inc.
3. Cooper Industries, Inc.
4. Encore Wire Corporation.
5. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.
6. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
7. Southwire Company.
B. Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2
and Type XHHW-2.
D. VFC Cable:
1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable.
2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus
85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire or dual spirally
wrapped copper tape shields and three bare symmetrically applied ground wires, and
sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.
3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and II, Division 2 hazardous
location applications.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. 3M.
2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
3. Gardner Bender.
4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
5. Ideal Industries, Inc.
6. NSi Industries LLC.
7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and
larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,
single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2,
single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2,
single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG.
F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors
in raceway.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-
steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
J. VFD Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-4
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-5
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feeding the following critical
equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
a. 20HP motor and larger feeders.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and
larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-1
SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Multimode optical-fiber cabling.
2. UTP cabling.
3. RS-485 cabling.
4. Low-voltage control cabling.
5. Control-circuit conductors.
6. Identification products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are
connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from
heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.
D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Source quality-control reports.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-2
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to
supervise on-site testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products
according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in
plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.
2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.
3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.
B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As
determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.
C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum
Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.
2.3 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. 3M.
2. Belden Inc.
3. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.
4. Corning Cable Systems.
5. Emerson Connectivity Solutions.
6. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.
7. Siemon.
B. Description: Multimode, 50/125 -micrometer, 24-fiber, tight-buffer, optical-fiber cable.
1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-3
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying
with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or
Type OFNR in metallic conduit.
b. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or
Type OFNR in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in
Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."
c. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or
Type OFNR in metallic conduit.
5. Conductive cable shall be steel-armored type.
6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.
7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
C. Jacket:
1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.
2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C.
3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to
exceed 40 inches.
2.4 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ADC.
2. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.
5. Corning Cable Systems.
6. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
7. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division.
8. Panduit Corp.
B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable
connectors.
1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.
D. Cable Connecting Hardware:
1. Comply with Optical-Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications
of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-4
2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC, Type ST. or Type LC connectors.
Insertion loss of not more than 0.75 dB.
3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.
2.5 UTP CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. 3M.
2. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.
3. Nexans.
4. Superior Essex Inc.
B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties of Category 5e cables.
2. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables.
3. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications.
4. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 5e.
a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or
Type CMP in listed plenum communications raceway.
b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CM, Type CMG, Type CMP, Type CMR,
or Type CMX in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring
in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."
c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMP or Type CMR in metallic conduit
installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-
Handling Spaces."
d. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM, Type CMG, Type CMP,
Type CMR, or Type CMX in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70,
Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."
2.6 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.
2. Belden Inc.
3. Corning Cable Systems.
4. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
5. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
6. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
7. Panduit Corp.
B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC
type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with
connecting hardware of same category or higher.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-5
C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables
terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs
and jacks where indicated.
D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and
permit interconnection between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at
each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position
modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.
G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with eight-position
modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
H. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.
I. Faceplates:
1. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Section 26 27 26
"Wiring Devices."
2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical-fiber, and
coaxial work area cords.
a. Flush-mounted jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
J. Legend:
1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
2.7 RS-485 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-6
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.
2.8 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.
B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
2.9 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.
2. Encore
3. Service Wire Co.
B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway.
C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway.
D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2.
E. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical
Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.
1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-7
C. Factory test optical-fiber cables according to TIA-568-C.3.
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.
1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as
supplemented or modified in this Section.
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.
2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by 2-1/8
inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the
finished wall surface.
3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends
between pull points.
C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:
1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is
installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around
perimeter walls of the room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.
E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and
form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-8
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6,
"Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems."
3. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.
Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch
panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced.
5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6
inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5,
"Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling
Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use
heat lamps for heating.
9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling
Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
10. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles.
11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as
to not damage cables.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.
2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 27 15 00 "Communications
Horizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated.
3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain
cable geometry.
D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:
1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 33
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
E. Optical-Fiber Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.
2. Terminate cable on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
F. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings
by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-9
3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or
other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and
corrugated panels.
G. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded
copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including
electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12
inches.
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24
inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2
inches.
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6
inches.
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12
inches.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power
lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3
inches.
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6
inches.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5
kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those
installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-10
3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.
3.7 GROUNDING
A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM,
"Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-
606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with
UL 969.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical-fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party
certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin
assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-11
3. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and
polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test
cables after termination but not after cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified
in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters
that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
4. Optical-Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.0.
Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer
for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction
according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB that calculated
according to equation in TIA-568-C.0.
C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is
formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument
to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 26 05 23
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:
1. Underground distribution grounding.
2. Foundation steel electrodes.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in
"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1. Test wells.
2. Ground rods.
3. Ground rings.
4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency’s field supervisor.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-2
a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells
ground rings grounding connections for separately derived systems based on
NETA MTS.
1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain
within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective
action if values do not.
2) Include recommended testing intervals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. ERICO International Corporation.
3. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.
4. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
6. Robbins Lightning, Inc.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise
required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-3
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 412 inches in cross
section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall
comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested
at 5000 V.
2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG
minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as
part of duct-bank installation.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-4
C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches
above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.
1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.
2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.
3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
(10 feet minimum) from each other and located at least the same distance from other
grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and
shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-5
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells
and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are
connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-6
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-1
SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for the following:
a. Hangers.
b. Steel slotted support systems.
c. Nonmetallic support systems.
d. Trapeze hangers.
e. Clamps.
f. Turnbuckles.
g. Sockets.
h. Eye nuts.
i. Saddles.
j. Brackets.
2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support
systems.
1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components.
2. Steel slotted-channel systems.
3. Nonmetallic slotted-channel systems.
4. Equipment supports.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-2
5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.
1. Include design calculations and details of trapeze hangers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for
field assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cooper Industries, Inc.
b. Flex-Strut Inc.
c. Haydon Corporation.
d. MKT Metal Manufacturing, Inc.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.
2. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
5. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable
iron.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-3
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Hilti, Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) B-line, an Eaton business.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti, Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS
Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways
and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-4
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without
exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
article.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for
reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-5
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-1
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
5. Surface raceways.
6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
DEFINITIONS
C. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
D. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit
G. LFNC or LFNMC: Liquuidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-2
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their
mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
7. Patriot Aluminum Products, LLC.
8. Picoma Industries, Inc.
9. Republic Conduit.
10. Robroy Industries.
11. Southwire Company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.
13. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-3
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; aluminum.
I. LFMC: (CLASS 1/ DIV 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS ONLY) Flexible steel conduit with PVC
jacket and complying with UL 360.
J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and
NFPA 70.
2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel or die cast.
b. Type: compression.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX INC.
5. CertainTeed Corporation.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. Electri-Flex Company.
8. Kraloy.
9. Lamson & Sessions.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-4
10. Niedax Inc.
11. RACO; Hubbell.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, and Type EPC-80-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651
unless otherwise indicated.
E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.
I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and
material.
K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
3. MonoSystems, Inc.
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 4 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-5
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Adalet.
2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
7. Hubbell Incorporated.
8. Kraloy.
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
10. MonoSystems, Inc.
11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
13. RACO; Hubbell.
14. Robroy Industries.
15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
16. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.
17. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum,
Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast
aluminum with gasketed cover.
H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-6
J. Gangable boxes are allowed.
K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 4 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
L. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC, concrete encased.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment):
a. Class 1, Division 1 and 2 locations: LFMC.
b. Non-hazardous or unclassified locations: LFNC
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
6. Conduit, Class1/Division 1 or 2 Locations: GRC, IMC, and concreted-encased Type
EPC-80 PVC
7. Boxes and Enclosures, Class 1/Division 1: UL listed for the location
8. Boxes and Enclosures, Class 1/Division 2: NEMA 250, Type 4X
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC IMC. Raceway locations include
the following:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-7
c. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FNC, except use LFNC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC IMC.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless
steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Aluminum conduits or fittings in direct contact with concrete shall be coated with coal tar
epoxy or installed with a conduit sleeve
G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-8
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit1-inchparallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles
to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at
maximum 10-footintervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.
J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
R. Surface Raceways:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-9
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points.
2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.
Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue
are not acceptable support methods.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70, except for conduit transitions from hazardous to
non-hazardous location, which shall be sealed as detailed on the drawings
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install
in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds
100 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
e. .
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install
fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-10
W. Flexible Conduit Connections to Light Fixtures: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of
72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to
vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
X. Flexible Conduit Connections to Vibrating and Motor Loads: Maximum of 18 inches in length.
Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to
center of box unless otherwise indicated.
Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-11
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-1
SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories.
2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer or Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption
of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Engineer’s or Owner's
written permission.
B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is at grade level unless a lower water table is noted
on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
A. Comply with ANSI C2.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-2
2.2 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching
fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.3 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ARNCO Corp.
2. Beck Manufacturing.
3. CANTEX INC.
4. CertainTeed Corporation.
5. Condux International, Inc.
6. ElecSys, Inc.
7. Electri-Flex Company.
8. IPEX USA LLC.
9. Lamson & Sessions.
10. Manhattan/CDT.
B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-80 and
Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the
duct.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final
arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.
Notify Architect and Engineer if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing
structures or archaeological sites to remain.
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes
with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with
other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations
as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes,
and as approved by Architect.
3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION
A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80, or Type EPC-40-
PVC, as indicated on the drawings in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-3
B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80, or Type EPC-40-
PVC, as indicated on the drawings, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct
bank unless otherwise indicated.
D. Underground Ducts Crossing Driveways Roadways and Railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-
PVC.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-
duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless
otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.
C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore
vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and
mulching.
D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures.
3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.
B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away
from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to
drain in both directions.
C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use
manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches both horizontally and
vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in
same plane.
E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel
to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to
environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated
to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line,
install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.
F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells,
spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 45-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct
sizes.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-4
1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without
reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in
the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting
near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated expansion of
more than 3/4 inch.
3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at
least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building,
and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition.
Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare
ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic
pressure.
I. Pulling Cord: Install 100 200-lbf-test nylon cord in empty ducts.
J. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank.
2. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor
temperature.
3. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line.
5. Install ducts with a minimum of 37.5 inches between ducts o.c. for like services and 12
inches between power and signal ducts.
6. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at
building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
7. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work
toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and
contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing
each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp.
Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand
tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections
at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with
requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.
a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a minimum
of 6 inches above top level of duct bank.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-5
b. Place minimum 6 inches of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct
bank.
K. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried ducts and
duct banks, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of
duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a
nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, horizontally.
L. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts
and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an
additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18
inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation
of underground ducts and utility structures.
2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and
adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch-long
mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions
and retest.
3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in
Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout
ducts.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
END OF SECTION 26 05 43
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels, including arc-flash warning labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.
B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system
components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components
used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-2
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
B. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."
C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
3. Arc Flash Warning: As required by the arc flash study.
2.3 LABELS
A. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible labels
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear
adhesive tape for securing label ends.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Champion America.
c. emedco.
d. Grafoplast Wire Markers.
e. LEM Products Inc.
f. Marking Services, Inc.
g. Panduit Corp.
B. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit
diameters of raceways they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Marking Services, Inc.
c. Panduit Corp.
C. Self-Adhesive Labels:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Brother International Corporation.
c. emedco.
d. Grafoplast Wire Markers.
e. Ideal Industries, Inc.
f. LEM Products Inc.
g. Marking Services, Inc.
h. Panduit Corp.
2. Preprinted or Write-on, 3-mil-thick, polyester or vinyl flexible label with acrylic
pressure-sensitive adhesive.
a. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating,
protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable and raceway
diameter, such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
3. Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant,
pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other
access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
a. Nominal Size: 3.5-by-5-inch.
4. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by
printer manufacturer.
2.4 BANDS AND TUBES:
A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-
colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceways or
cables they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Marking Services, Inc.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-4
B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed
identification labels, sized to suit diameters of and shrunk to fit firmly around cables they
identify. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. 3M.
2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS:
A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Carlton Industries, LP.
b. Champion America.
c. Ideal Industries, Inc.
d. Marking Services, Inc.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils
thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Carlton Industries, LP.
c. emedco.
C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits 600 V or Less: 4-inch-wide black stripes on
10-inch centers placed diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway
or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. LEM Products Inc.
b. Marking Services, Inc.
D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black
stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
E. Underground-Line Warning Tape
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-5
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Ideal Industries, Inc.
c. LEM Products Inc.
d. Marking Services, Inc.
e. Reef Industries, Inc.
2. Tape:
a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to
identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation
when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found
in soils.
3. Color and Printing:
a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and
ANSI Z535.5.
b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE".
c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".
F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be
1 inch.
2.6 TAGS
A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with
self-locking cable tie fastener.
B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and
voltage level, with factory screened or printed permanent designations; punched for use with
self-locking cable tie fastener.
C. Write-On Tags:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Carlton Industries, LP.
b. LEM Products Inc.
2. Polyester Tags 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to raceway, conductor, or cable.
3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-6
2.7 SIGNS
A. Baked-Enamel Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.
B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-
inch galvanized-steel backing and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.
C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Engraved legend.
2. Thickness:
a. For signs up to 20 sq. inches, minimum 1/16-inch-.
b. For signs larger than 20 sq. inches, 1/8 inch thick.
c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.8 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,
self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-7
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.
5. Color: Black.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean
substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer of identification product.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent
designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to
provide view of identifying devices.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-8
I. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
J. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at
50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested
areas.
K. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above
cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of
multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-
inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of
raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH
VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends.
Apply stripes to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that
is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in
the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl
labels. Install labels 30-foot maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install
labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels containing the wiring system
legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. "EMERGENCY POWER."
2. "POWER."
3. "UPS."
4. ”CONTROLS”
5. “DATA”.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors
listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-9
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic preprinted tags colored and marked
to indicate phase, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
G. Install instructional sign, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
H. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,
manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor
or cable designation, origin, and destination.
I. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations,
provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation.
J. Conductors To Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.
K. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker-tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
operation and maintenance manual.
L. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-10
M. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
N. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power-transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
c. .
O. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive thermal transfer vinyl labels.
1. Comply with NFPA 70E and ANSI Z535.4.
2. Comply with Section 26 05 74 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study"
requirements for arc-flash warning labels.
P. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Q. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer.
R. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm unless equipment is provided
with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic
label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high
letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2
inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label Stenciled
legend 4 inches high.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-11
d. Unless labels are provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten them
with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL
rating of the enclosure.
2. Equipment To Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-
adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Substations.
h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
i. Motor-control centers.
j. Enclosed switches.
k. Enclosed circuit breakers.
l. Enclosed controllers.
m. Variable-speed controllers.
n. Push-button stations.
o. Power-transfer equipment.
p. Contactors.
q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
r. Battery-inverter units.
s. Battery racks.
t. Power-generating units.
u. Monitoring and control equipment.
v. UPS equipment.
w. .
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-1
SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Distribution and buck-boost, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1500 kVA.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.
2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,
installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control
of temperature and humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
2. Acme Electric Corporation.
3. Eaton.
4. Federal Pacific.
5. Hammond Power Solutions Inc.
6. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA
TP 2.
D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.
E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.
F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin
encapsulated.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-3
G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints
that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are
easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound utilizing
a vacuum pressure impregnation process to seal out moisture and air.
2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.
D. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated.
1. NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless Steel: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin
compound, sealing out moisture and air.
E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Powder coat painted white.
F. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None.
G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below
normal full capacity.
H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
I. Insulation Class: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.
J. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and
output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
K. Wall Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets for mounting on equipment rack.
L. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-4
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted
with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 05 53
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
D. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers
for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount transformer level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer
installed on equipment rack.
B. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce
noise generation.
C. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-5
D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate
sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1
SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
E. SPD: Surge protective device.
F. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and
components indicated.
2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,
equipment features, and ratings.
3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,
knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2
4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
6. Series rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices is prohibited.
7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.
8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
10. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
11. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an
Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.
3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each
size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer’s written
permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. SPD Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for outdoor location: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel with powder coat white
finish.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-4
2. Height: 84 inches maximum.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and
other components.
F. Incoming Mains:
1. Location: Convertible between top and bottom.
2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main
breaker.
G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.
b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective
devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance
applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure.
H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.
3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,
for larger conductors.
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in
the panelboard.
5. Ground Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.
I. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting
and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures,
wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company
for exact requirements.
J. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,
filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 20 percent.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-5
K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting
capacity.
1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-
circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.
2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V
shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms
symmetrical.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying
with UL 1449 SPD Type 1 or Type 2.
2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Square D, I-Line Type
2. Eaton.
3. Siemens Energy.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs, as indicated on the drawings.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release
for removal or bolt-on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: P
or bolt-on circuit breakerslug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Square D Type NQ
2. Eaton
3. Siemens Energy.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-6
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs as indicated on drawings.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with
tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door
shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and
bus shall remain concealed.
F. SPD.
1. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per
phase shall not be less than 240 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic
sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.
2. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-
phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
a. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.
b. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.
c. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.
d. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.
3. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 208/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall
not exceed the following:
a. Line to Neutral: 700 V.
b. Line to Ground: 700 V.
c. Neutral to Ground: 700 V.
d. Line to Line: 1200 V.
4. SCCR: Equal to or exceed 100 kA.
G. Buses:
1. Copper phase and neutral buses
2. Copper equipment ground buses.
2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. Siemens Energy.
3. Square D, by Schneider Electric
B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-7
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.
b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:
a. RMS sensing.
b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.
c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.
d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.
e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and
magnitude of fault that caused the trip.
f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.
g. Field-Adjustable Settings:
1) Instantaneous trip.
2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3) Long and short time adjustments.
4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.
4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
5. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,
and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC
rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with
transparent plastic protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it
from all other circuits.
2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that
equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified
in NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have
been subjected to water saturation.
D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
G. Mounting panelboards with space behind is recommended for damp, wet, or dirty locations. The
steel slotted supports in the following paragraph provide an even mounting surface and the
recommended space behind to prevent moisture or dirt collection.
H. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque
wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to
ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes and connections to separate ground bars.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-9
J. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning
signs complying with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten
directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for
Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-10
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Weather-resistant receptacles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton (Arrow Hart).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2
2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description:
1. Straight blade, feed-through type.
2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer
provides proper GFCI protection.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2. Description:
a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding
screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting
strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on
removable parts.
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Device Color:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-3
1. Wiring Devices: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device
listing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
6. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-4
8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is
not required.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering for normal power circuits and red-filled
lettering for emergency power circuits on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside
outlet boxes.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-1
SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Receptacle switches.
4. Shunt trip switches.
5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
6. Molded-case switches.
7. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data
on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-2
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's field service report.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
3. .
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-3
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's written
permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. Siemens Industry, Inc.
3. Square D, by Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
E. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate
before switch blades open.
6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. Siemens Industry, Inc.
3. Square D, by Schneider Electric.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-5
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
E. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate
before switch blades open.
5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bussmann, an Eaton business.
2. Littelfuse, Inc.
B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA
interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.
C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse
block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed
position.
D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and
secondary fuses, with a control power source of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,
connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.
E. Accessories:
1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.
2. Oiltight green ON pilot light.
3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.
4. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-6
2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. Siemens Industry, Inc.
3. Square D, by Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field-adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style
fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse
compartment door.
H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations
with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
I. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type
with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay
settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-
sequence current transformer/sensor.
5. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with functions
and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in
Section 26 09 13 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-7
6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional
time delay.
8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
9. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be
removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-
fault protection function.
12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
13. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac.
2.5 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. Siemens Industry, Inc.
3. Square D, by Schneider Electric
B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit
withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.
C. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with
mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings,
push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence
current transformer/sensor.
4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional
time delay.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped.
8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be
removable only when switch is in off position.
9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-8
2.6 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,
to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel.
3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C. Install fuses in fusible devices.
D. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-9
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and
circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-10
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1
SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Stripping and stockpiling rock.
6. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities and abandoning site
utilities in place.
8. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally
occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.
B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas,
surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the
surface soil can be subsoil.
C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-
place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious,
and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of
subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; and free of
weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.
D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.
E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction and indicated on Drawings.
F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2
1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and
site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by site clearing.
1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings.
2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each
tree or other plant designated to remain.
B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program.
C. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other
subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically
demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and
equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of
stockpiles.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on
property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.
C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
Owner's premises, coordinate location with owner’s representative.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify Sunshine One Call for area where Project is located before site
clearing.
E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-
control and plant-protection measures are in place.
F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged
and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Protect trees and plants to remain on site.
B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations.
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.
B. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 4
C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer and Utility Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer written permission.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 2 inches in diameter, obstructions, and
debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.
3. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.
4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste
materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and
other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste
materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other
materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust
and erosion by water.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate
new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 5
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut a long
line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut
faces vertically.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials.
Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling
facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION 31 10 00
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1
SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Geotechnical Reports have been prepared for the project. The contractor shall review the reports
for general subsurface conditions, recommendations for construction, etc. and comply with all
recommendations therein.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.
2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants.
3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
5. Subbase course for concrete walks.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.
8. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed
over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.
2. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling
topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.
3. Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during
construction.
4. Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet
piling of excavations.
5. Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including
preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.
6. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit
excavation and planting.
7. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, Section 204 “Graded Aggregate Base” for base courses beneath
pavement.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 2
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer often supporting a slab-on-grade that minimizes upward
capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix
asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services
within buildings.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.
c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and
plant-protection zones.
d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.
e. Field quality control.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 3
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:
1. Geotextiles/ Geo synthetics.
2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.
3. Detectable Warning tapes.
B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:
1. Geotextile/ Geo Synthetics.: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
2. Detectable Warning Tape: 12 inches (300 mm) long; of each color.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: For each borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.
B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during earth-moving operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on
property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Owner’s Project
Representative.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth-moving operations.
D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and
sedimentation-control measures are in place.
E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures are in place.
F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 4
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations. Satisfactory and Unsatisfactory soils will be identified by
Geotechnical Engineer on site
B. Satisfactory Soils: See A above. General description follows: Soil Classification Groups GW,
GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free
of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: See A above. General description follows: Soil Classification Groups GC,
SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these
groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a
1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
E. Base Course: As specified in FDOT Specifications, Section 204.
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a
1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
fractured stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent
passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
H. Drainage Course Drainage Gravel, #57 stone: Narrowly graded mixture of washed, crushed
stone or gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-
1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 5
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-
inch (25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
J. Filter Material for pond filters will adhere specifications and characteristics given in plans.
K. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.
L. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 GEOTEXTILES/ GEO SYNTHETICS
A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for
subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater
than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test
methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made
from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with
AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
C. Turf Reinforcement Mat: A geo synthetic consisting of a synthetic fiber matrix continued
between nets, top and bottom.
1. TRMs shall be Landlok 450 (unless indicated otherwise on the plans)
2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL
A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, flowable concrete material produced from
the following:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum
aggregate size.
4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
5. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
B. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 140-psi (965-kPa)
compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495/C 495M.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 6
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility,
with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal
detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving
operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary
protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 7
2. Remove rock and obstructions to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of
permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast
against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)
wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile
cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced
material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.
3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing
surfaces.
B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose
roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that
rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree
and Plant Protection."
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 8
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than
top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate
trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions
with tamped sand backfill.
3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support
conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
4. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-
tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed
roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities.
3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree
and Plant Protection."
3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded
10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes) to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as
directed.
D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 9
E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when
approved by Engineer.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by
Engineer.
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, damp
proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450
mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of
footings. Concrete is specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.
D. Initial Backfill:
1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger
than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or
conduit.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 10
a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on
both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E. Final Backfill:
1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade
elevation.
F. Detectable Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm)
below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Except final 12” of fill shall
be as required by landscape plans and specifications.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use foundations and footings, fill approved by the
geotechnical engineer.
C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry density.
3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth
for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm)
in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 11
1. Under structures, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of
existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. Reference
#5 below.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. Top 12”
below final grade shall be as specified in landscape plans and specifications.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 92
percent.
5. Under building slabs, foundations, and footings, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of
existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material as recommended by the
Geotechnical Engineer.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the
following subgrade tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 33 46 00 "Subdrainage."
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated,
to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick.
Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides
and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry density according to
ASTM D 1557.
2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- (150-mm-) thick
compacted layers to final subgrade.
3.18 BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS
A. Place base courses under pavements according to FDOT Specification Section 204.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 12
3.19 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDERWALKS
A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under walks as follows:
1. Install separation geotextile if shown on plans on prepared subgrade according to
manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place subbase course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than
3 inches (75 mm) thick.
4. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according
to.
3.20 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Drainage courses shall be provided where shown on plans.
B. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
C. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
1. Install subdrainage geotextile (when required by plans) on prepared subgrade according
to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than
3 inches (75 mm) thick.
4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.21 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Additional requirements may be necessary for earthwork associated with
structural building components. Comply with all requirements stated herein as well as in the
structural plans.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Engineer.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 13
E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, or ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the
following locations and frequencies:
1. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, as
required by the Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At subgrade and each compacted backfill layer, at least one
test for every 25 feet (30 m) or less of wall length but (no fewer than two tests) or as
directed by Geotechnical Engineer..
3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for
every 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.
F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.22 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 31 20 00
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 14
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EXCAVATION 31 23 16 - 1
SECTION 31 23 16 - EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil densification.
2. Excavating for building foundations.
3. Excavating for paving, roads, and parking areas.
4. Excavating for slabs-on-grade.
5. Excavating for site structures.
6. Excavating for landscaping.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches.
2. Section 31 23 23 - Fill.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Local utility standards when working within 24 inches of utility lines.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation
required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural
calculations to support plan.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate soil densification grid for each size and configuration footing requiring
soils densification.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Wakulla County standard.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Prepare excavation protection plan under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced
in design of this Work and licensed in State of Florida.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EXCAVATION 31 23 16 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Call Local Utility Line Information service at Sunshine One Call not less than three working days
before performing Work.
1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction
areas.
B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
D. Protect utilities indicated to remain from damage.
E. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcroppings and other features remaining as portion of final
landscaping.
F. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and
curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work.
B. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade paving and site structures,
and construction operations.
C. Excavate to working elevation for piling work.
D. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing
capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 23 and Section 31 23 17.
E. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.
F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.
H. Trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
I. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. Remove larger
material as specified in Section 31 23 23.
J. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions.
K. Correct areas over excavated with structural fill as directed by Engineer.
L. Remove excess and unsuitable material from site.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EXCAVATION 31 23 16 - 3
M. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Request inspection of excavation and controlled fill operations in accordance with applicable
code.
C. Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces by Engineer before installing subsequent work.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.
B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.
C. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral
movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.
END OF SECTION 31 23 16
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EXCAVATION 31 23 16 - 4
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 1
SECTION 31 23 17 - TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to utility service.
2. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations.
3. Backfilling and compaction.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: General backfilling.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:
1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a
4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
2. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method.
3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).
4. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method.
5. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
6. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation
required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural
calculations to support plan.
C. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 2
D. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Wakulla County standard.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Prepare excavation protection plan under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced
in design of this Work and licensed in State of Florida.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation
utilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LINES AND GRADES
A. Lay pipes to lines and grades indicated on Drawings.
1. Engineer reserves right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths of utilities when
changes are required for Project conditions.
B. Use laser-beam instrument with qualified operator to establish lines and grades.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Call Local Utility Line Information service at Sunshine One Call not less than three working days
before performing Work.
1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction
areas.
B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 3
C. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as portion of final
landscaping.
D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating
equipment and vehicular traffic.
E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.
F. Establish temporary traffic control and detours when trenching is performed in public right-of-
way. Relocate controls and reroute traffic as required during progress of Work.
3.3 TRENCHING
A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities to utility service.
B. Perform excavation within 24 inches of existing utility service in accordance with utility’s
requirements.
C. Do not advance open trench more than 200 feet ahead of installed pipe.
D. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove water or
materials that interfere with Work.
E. Excavate bottom of trenches maximum 2 feet wider than outside diameter of pipe.
F. Excavate trenches to depth indicated on Drawings. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and
support for bedding material and pipe.
G. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
H. When Project conditions permit, slope side walls of excavation starting 2 feet above top of pipe.
When side walls can not be sloped, provide sheeting and shoring to protect excavation as
specified in this section.
I. When subsurface materials at bottom of trench are loose or soft, excavate to greater depth as
directed by Engineer until suitable material is encountered.
J. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with Structural Fill
and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.
K. Trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.
L. Correct areas over excavated areas with compacted backfill as specified for authorized excavation
or replace with fill concrete as directed by Engineer.
M. Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet and protect from
erosion.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 4
3.4 SHEETING AND SHORING
A. Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures and adjacent
properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of surrounding subsoil.
B. Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation work.
C. Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement of filled
excavations or adjacent soil.
D. Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or other causes
resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing.
3.5 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over
porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Place material in continuous layers as follows:
1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum12 inches compacted depth.
2. Structural Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.
3. Granular Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.
D. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage,
utilities in trench.
E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
F. Do not leave more than 50 feet of trench open at end of working day.
G. Protect open trench to prevent danger to the public.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557.
C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 5
1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556.
2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017.
D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact,
and retest.
E. Frequency of Tests: One test for every 2,000 square feet but not less than 3 tests per project site.
3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.
3.9 SCHEDULE
A. Storm and Sanitary Piping:
1. Cover pipe and bedding with Fill Type: To subgrade elevation.
2. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.
B. Duct Bank:
1. Cover duct and bedding with Fill: To subgrade elevation.
2. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.
END OF SECTION 31 23 17
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 1
SECTION 31 23 20 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes construction dewatering.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and
dewatering system progress.
2. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and
controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Dewatering observation wells are part of dewatering bid item.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
2. Review condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosion-
control measures and temporary controls and protections.
3. Review geotechnical report.
4. Review proposed site clearing and excavations.
5. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
6. Review observation and monitoring of dewatering system.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 2
2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers,
headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control
of sediment, and disposal of water.
3. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance
of dewatering system.
4. Include written plan for dewatering operations including sequence of well and well-point
placement coordinated with excavation shoring and bracings and control procedures to be
adopted if dewatering problems arise.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer land surveyor and professional engineer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of
adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
dewatering operations. Submit before Work begins.
D. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped wells and well points and other
abandoned-in-place dewatering equipment.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of dewatering
systems and dewatering work.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent
existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points
to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain
dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to
lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to
proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control,
stability of excavations and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding in excavation, and
prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent structures.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 3
3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site
improvements adjacent to excavation.
5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and debris-disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering
operations.
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from
ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or surrounding area.
2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate
routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
D. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in
Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls” during dewatering operations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water
disposal, and surface-water controls.
1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.
2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.
B. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating
below ground-water level.
C. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 4
D. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain
dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.
3.3 OPERATION
A. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill
materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.
B. Operate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of
structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Drain water-bearing strata above
and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade
softening, and slope instability.
2. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of
foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
3. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below bottom of excavation.
C. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,
property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment
in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.
D. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well
holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Observation Wells: Provide observation wells or piezometers, take measurements, and maintain
at least the minimum number indicated; additional observation wells may be required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in
observation wells.
2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or
destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend
construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from
observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.
3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.
B. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks monthly during dewatering and maintain an
accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify
Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent
construction.
C. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the
dewatering operation.
D. Prepare reports of observations.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 5
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect and maintain dewatering system during dewatering operations.
B. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.
END OF SECTION 31 23 20
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 FILL 31 23 23 - 1
SECTION 31 23 23 - FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backfilling building perimeter to subgrade elevations.
2. Fill under slabs-on-grade.
3. Fill under paving.
4. Fill for over-excavation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.
2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Backfilling of utility trenches.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:
1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a
4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
2. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method.
3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).
4. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method.
5. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
6. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 FILL 31 23 23 - 2
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Wakulla County standard.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected.
C. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after
backfilling.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with structural fill and
compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
C. Scarify subgrade surface to depth of 6 inch.
D. Proof roll to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements
for subsequent fill material.
3.3 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over
porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Place geotextile fabric over fill prior to placing next lift of fill.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 FILL 31 23 23 - 3
D. Place material in continuous layers as follows:
1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum12 inches compacted depth.
2. Structural Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.
3. Granular Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.
E. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation
walls.
H. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.
I. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless
noted otherwise.
J. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
L. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Top Surface of Backfilling Within Building Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
C. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
D. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557.
C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following:
1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D2922.
2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017.
D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.
E. Frequency of Tests: One every 2,000 square feet, but never less than three per site.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 FILL 31 23 23 - 4
F. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade, pavers, paving.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
END OF SECTION 31 23 23
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 1
SECTION 31 25 01 - SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
necessary to perform all installation, maintenance, removal, and area cleanup related to
sedimentation control work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein or as
required to prevent the transport of silt or sediment outside the limits of construction.
The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, installation of temporary
access ways and staging areas, silt fences, temporary seeding, turbidity barriers,
sediment removal and disposal, device maintenance, removal of temporary devices,
temporary mulching, and final cleanup.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Sedimentation and Erosion Control Plan. This
plan shall be used as a minimum in developing the Pollution Prevention Plan for the
NPDES permit application (notification) to be filed by the CONTRACTOR.
1.2 RELATED WORK (REQUIREMENTS)
A. Section 32 92 25 – Sodding; Sodding for temporary erosion control.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days after award of Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the
ENGINEER for approval, technical product literature for all commercial products to be
used for sedimentation and erosion control.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the timely installation and maintenance of
all sedimentation control devices necessary to prevent the movement of sediment from
the construction site to off-site areas, via surface runoff or underground drainage
systems. Measures in addition to those shown on the Drawings necessary to prevent the
movement of sediment outside the limits of construction shall be installed, maintained,
removed, and cleaned up at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. No additional charges
to the OWNER will be considered.
B. Sedimentation and erosion control measures shall conform to the Best Management
Practices outlined in the Drawings and in the Florida Development Manual.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Silt Fence
1. Steel posts shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length, 2-1/2-in by 2-1/2-in by 1/4-in
angle post with self-fastening tabs and a 5-in by 4-in (nominal) steel anchor plate
at bottom.
2. Welded wire fabric shall be 4-in by 4-in mesh of 12 gauge by 12 gauge steel wire.
3. Silt fence fabric shall be a woven, polypropylene, ultraviolet resistant material
such as Mirafi 100X as manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC or equal.
4. Tie wires for securing silt fence fabric to wire mesh shall be light gauge metal
clips (hog rings), or 1/32-in diameter soft aluminum wire.
5. Prefabricated commercial silt fence may be substituted for built-in-field fence.
Pre-fabricated silt fence shall be "Envirofence" as manufactured by Mirafi Inc.,
Charlotte, NC or approved equal.
B. Turbidity Barriers: Turbidity barriers meeting FDOT Type I and Type II requirements
shall be provided. Turbidity barrier may be floating or staked, based on the conditions
at the location for installation. Turbidity barrier shall be capable of functioning
properly for flow conditions up to a 5 year/24 hour storm event. Turbidity barriers shall
be constructed of PVC or polypropylene material, all portions which will be exposed to
direct sunlight shall be ultraviolet resistant. All metal components shall be corrosion
resistant. Woven materials may be acceptable for installations where high flow
conditions may exist during storm events. Turbidity barriers shall be "Mark I", "Mark
II", or "PC-2" as manufactured by American Boom & Barrier Corporation, Cape
Canaveral, FL or approved equal.
C. Straw mulch shall be utilized on all newly graded areas to protect areas against
washouts and erosion. Straw mulch shall be comprised of threshed straw of oats,
wheat, barley, rye, or hay that is free from noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable
material. The straw mulch shall contain at least 50 percent by weight of material to be
10-in or longer. Straw shall be in an air-dry condition and suitable for placement with
blower equipment.
D. Latex acrylic copolymer, such as Soil Sealant with coalescing agent as manufactured by
Soil Stabilization Co., Merced, CA or approved equivalent shall be used as straw mulch
tackifier.
E. An asphalt tackifier may be used in place of a latex acrylic copolymer with prior written
approval from the ENGINEER.
F. Temporary Grassing: Certain areas of Grassing constructed in accordance with Section
32 92 25 may be designated by the ENGINEER as temporary erosion control features.
The ENGINEER may determine that permanent type grass seed be omitted from
Grassing and the specified rate of spread for fertilizer used in conjunction with grassing
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 3
operations be reduced when such work is designated as a temporary erosion control
feature.
G. Baled Hay or Straw: This work shall consist of construction of baled hay or straw dams
to protect against downstream accumulations of silt. The baled hay or straw dams shall
be constructed in accordance with the details in the FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design
Standards. All baled hay or straw utilized shall comply with the provisions of FDOT
Specification Section 104 for dry mulch.
H. Erosion control matting shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as approved by
the Engineer. Erosion control matting shall be North American Green P300 or
approved equal.
I. Excelsior matting shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as approved. Excelsior
matting shall be North American Green SC150 or approved equal.
J. Fabric formed concrete erosion protection shall be Armorform as manufactured by
Nicolon, or equal. Material shall correspond to the 4-inch thick Uniform Section Mat
(USM), or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LOCATION OF SEDIMENT/EROSION CONTROL AND TURBIDITY BARRIERS
A. At a minimum, sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed at all locations
shown on the plans and specified herein.
B. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed at 500 feet intervals along all swales
and ditches constructed and around all installed drainage structures prior to placement
of sod.
C. Sediment/erosion control shall be installed along all limits of construction.
D. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional sediment/erosion control and turbidity barriers
as needed to control the transport of silt and sediments outside of the limits of
construction.
E. Sediment/erosion control shall be installed around the base of all soil stockpile areas.
F. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed along the perimeter of all staging
areas.
G. All disturbed areas, greater than one (1) acre, in which construction activities have
stopped and are not anticipated to resume for a period of three months or longer shall be
temporarily seeded, within five days of stoppage of construction.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 4
H. All disturbed areas, greater than one (1) acre, in which construction activities have been
stopped and are not anticipated to resume for a period of 21 days, but not longer than
three months shall be temporarily mulched, within five days of stoppage of construction
in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Silt Fence Installation
1. Silt fences shall be positioned as specified indicated on the Drawings and as
necessary to prevent movement of sediment produced by construction activities
outside of the limits of construction or as approved.
2. Dig trench approximately 6-in wide and 6-in deep along proposed fence lines.
3. Drive metal-stakes, 8 feet on center (maximum) at back edge of trenches. Stakes
shall be driven 2 feet (minimum) into ground.
4. Hang 4 by 4 woven wire mesh on posts, setting bottom of wire in bottom of
trench. Secure wire to posts with self-fastening tabs.
5. Hang filter fabric on wire carrying to bottom of trench with about 4-in of fabric
laid across bottom of trench. Stretch fabric fairly taut along fence length and
secure with tie wires 12-in O.C. both ways.
6. Backfill trench with excavated material and tamp.
7. Install pre-fabricated silt fence according to MANUFACTURER's instructions.
B. Hay Bale Barrier
1. Bales shall be either wire-bound or string-tied with the bindings oriented around
the sides rather than over and under the bales.
2. Bales shall be placed lengthwise in a single row with the ends of adjacent bales
tightly abutting one another.
3. The barrier shall be entrenched and backfilled. A trench shall be excavated the
width of a bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a minimum depth of 4
inches. After bales are staked and chinked, the excavated soil shall be backfilled
against the barrier. Backfilled material shall conform to the ground level on the
downhill side and shall be built up to 2 inches against the uphill side.
4. Each bale shall be securely anchored by at least two stakes or rebars driven
through the bale. The first stake shall be driven toward the previously laid bale to
force the bales together. Stakes shall be driven deep enough into the ground to
securely anchor the bales.
5. The gaps between each bale shall be chinked (filled by wedging) with straw to
prevent water from escaping between the bales.
C. Turbidity Barriers
1. Turbidity barriers should extend the entire depth of the water.
2. Turbidity barriers should not be placed perpendicular to flow. Barriers should be
installed at an angle to the flow. Angle should be determined on the amount of
flow in the waterway and the MANUFACTURER's recommendation.
3. Turbidity barrier should be 10 to 20 percent longer than the straight line
measurement.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 5
4. Joints between panels should be kept to a minimum.
5. Barrier should extend to the top of bank. All ends should be secured firmly to the
shoreline.
6. Where significant flow is anticipated, a heavy woven pervious filter fabric may be
substituted.
D. Inlet Protection
1. Inlet protection shall be installed for all catch basins, drop inlets, drop structures,
inlets to drainage pipes, or other structures.
2. A 5-foot strip of sod shall be laid surrounding the perimeter of each structure.
3. A silt fence or haybale barrier shall be installed around the perimeter of the
sodded area.
E. Fabric Formed Concrete Erosion Protection
1. Fabric formed concrete erosion protection shall be installed as shown on the
drawings and in accordance with MANUFACTURER's recommendations.
F. Erosion Control and Excelsior Matting
1. Erosion control and excelsior matting blankets shall be installed as shown on the
drawings and as approved in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions.
The area to be covered shall be properly prepared before the blanket is applied.
When the blanket is unrolled, the netting shall be on top and the fibers in contact
with the soil over the entire area. The blankets shall be applied in the direction of
water flow, and stapled. Blankets shall be placed a minimum of three rows (of 4-
ft) wide (total approx. 12-fit width) and stapled together in accordance with
MANUFACTURER's instructions. Side overlaps shall be 6-in minimum. The
staples shall be made of wire, 0.091-in in diameter or greater, "U" shaped with
legs 10-in in length and a 1-1/2-in crown. The staples shall be driven vertically
into the ground, spaced approximately 2 linear feet apart, on each side, and one
row in the center alternately spaced between each side. Upper and lower ends of
the matting shall be buried to a depth of 4-in in a trench. The bottom of the fold
shall be 4-in below the ground surface. Staple on both sides of fold. Where the
matting must be cut or more than one roll length is required, turn down upper end
of downstream roll into a trench to a depth of 4-in. Overlap lower end of
upstream roll 4-inches past edge of downstream roll and staple.
2. To ensure full contact with soil surface, roll matting with a roller weighing 100
pounds per foot of width perpendicular to flow direction after placing matting,
stapling and seeding and sodding. Thoroughly inspect channel after completion.
Correct any areas where matting does not present a smooth surface in full contact
with the soil below.
3.3 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS
A. Inspections
1. CONTRACTOR shall make a visual inspection of all sedimentation and erosion
control devices (including turbidity barriers) once per week and promptly after
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 6
every rainstorm. If such inspection reveals that additional measures are needed to
prevent movement of sediment to areas outside the limits of construction,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly install additional devices as needed. Sediment
controls in need of maintenance shall be repaired promptly.
2. CONTRACTOR shall keep a log of all inspections indicating the following:
a. Date and time of inspection
b. Inspector
c. Amount of rainfall
d. Erosion and sediment control devices inspected
e. Condition of sediment and erosion control devices
f. Repairs needed
g. Date repair is completed
B. Device Maintenance
1. Silt Fences
a. Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of
the fabric.
b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2-ft minimum overlap.
c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the fence is filtering all
runoff directed to the fence.
2. Hay Bale Barriers
a. Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of
the hay bales.
b. Replace damaged hay bales.
c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the hay bales are filtering all
runoff directed to the barrier.
3. Inlet Protection
a. Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of
the barrier.
b. Remove all sediment accumulated within the barrier and replace damaged
sod.
c. Make other repair as necessary to ensure that the inlet protection device is
operating properly.
4. Turbidity Barriers
a. Turbidity barriers shall be inspected on a daily basis.
b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2 foot minimum overlap.
c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure barriers are effectively
maintaining turbidity levels outside of the barrier within regulatory limits.
3.4 TEMPORARY MULCHING
A. Apply temporary mulch to areas where rough grading has been completed but final
grading is not anticipated to begin within 21 days of the completion of rough grading.
If construction activities are not planned to resume for three months or longer, the
temporary seeding requirements shall be followed.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 7
B. Straw mulch shall be applied at rate of 2,000 lbs/acre and tackified with latex acrylic
copolymer at a rate of 1 gal/1000 ft2 diluted in a ratio of 30 parts water to 1 part latex
acrylic copolymer mix.
C. After temporary mulching, traffic should be kept to a minimum, except for designated
temporary access roads.
3.5 REMOVAL AND FINAL CLEANUP
A. Once the site has been fully stabilized against erosion, remove sediment control devices
and all accumulated silt. Dispose of silt and waste materials in proper manner. Regrade
all areas disturbed during this process and stabilize against erosion with surfacing
materials as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
END OF SECTION 31 25 01
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 8
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1
SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-
aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.
2. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at
pavement terminations.
3. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction (FDOT Specifications), latest edition.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location
of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
b. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic
during installation period and for remainder of construction period.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.
2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by FDOT, of approval of each job mix proposed for the
Work.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Material Certificates: For each paving material.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by
FDOT authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of FDOT for asphalt paving work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following
conditions are not met:
1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).
2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time
of placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Provide materials as required by the FDOT specifications for the asphalt pavement types
indicated on the plans. If no pavement type is indicated the pavement shall be Superpave SP
12.5.
2.2 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by FDOT State
Materials Office and complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where
Project is located.
2. Surface Course: Superpave SP 12.5 with no more than 20 percent Recycled Asphalt
Pavement (RAP).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons (13.6 tonnes).
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 3
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare surface in accordance with FDOT Specifications. In addition, immediately
before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces.
Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
3.3 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT
A. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of any paving operations.
B. Place asphalt in accordance with FDOT Specifications.
3.4 COMPACTION
A. General: Compact hot-mix paving in accordance with FDOT Specifications.
B. Compaction shall obtain an average density of 92 percent of reference laboratory density
according to FM 1-T 209 as modified by the FDOT Specifications, but not less than 90 percent
or greater than 100 percent.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
following tolerances:
1. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied
transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to FM 1-T 16.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 4
1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from
four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared
according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, with no fewer than three cores taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear
method according to FM 1-T 238 and correlated with FM 1-T 166.
E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.7 WASTE HANDLING
General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan.
END OF SECTION 32 12 16
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 WHEEL STOPS 32 17 14 - 1
SECTION 32 17 14 - WHEEL STOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WHEEL STOPS
A. Concrete Wheel Stops: Precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, 4000-psi minimum
compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered
corners, transverse drainage slots on underside, and a minimum of two factory-formed or -
drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to substrate.
1. Surface Appearance: Free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, and other obvious
defects. Corners shall be uniform, straight, and sharp.
2. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel hardware as standard with wheel-stop
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive before anchoring.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 WHEEL STOPS 32 17 14 - 2
C. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in
wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Recess head of hardware beneath top
of wheel stop.
END OF SECTION 32 17 13
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 1
SECTION 32 17 23 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For interior, field-applied, pavement-marking paints,
documentation included printed statement of VOC content.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction of the Florida
Department of Transportation (FDOT) for pavement-marking work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at
a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising for alkyd materials, and not
exceeding 95 deg F. Do not apply traffic stripes and markings when winds are sufficient to
cause spray dust.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All traffic marking materials shall be one of the products listed on the FDOT Qualified Products
List.
2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT
A. Pavement markings shall comply with the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 2
B. All stop bars, and stripes or markings located in the public right-of-way, regardless of location,
shall be thermoplastic. All other markings shall be painted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Engineer.
B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply markings in accordance with the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction.
3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 32 17 23
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1
SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Seeding.
2. Hydroseeding.
3. Sodding.
4. Plugging.
5. Sprigging.
6. Meadow grasses and wildflowers.
7. Turf renovation.
8. Erosion-control material(s).
9. Grass paving.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified
with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 2
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.
B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture,
stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and
percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of
packaging.
1. Certification of each seed mixture for turf grass sod. Include identification of source and
name and telephone number of supplier.
C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.
D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to
Project.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of
turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful
turf establishment.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
2. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication
of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.
B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for
Turf grass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turf grass Sod Transplanting and Installation"
sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turf grass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours
of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
C. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,
or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 3
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TURF GRASS SOD
A. Turf grass Sod: Approved, complying with "Specifications for Turf grass Sod Materials" in
TPI's "Guideline Specifications to turf grass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density,
color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when
planted.
B. Turf grass Species: St. Augustine Palmetto.
2.2 FERTILIZERS
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of
fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea
formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent
phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil
reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
2.3 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat,
rye, oats, or barley.
2.4 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination
or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth
that has already germinated.
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
installation and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture
content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting
soil.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and
plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION
1. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in place over exposed subgrade Reduce
elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
B. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.4 SODDING
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil
or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 5
pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between
pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after
planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth
of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.
3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,
replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll,
regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf.
Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new
mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.
3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.
Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of
pesticides and reduce hazards.
B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey
water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or
mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly
planted areas.
2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall
precipitation is adequate.
C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified
height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of
grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades
bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent
mowings to maintain the following grass height:
1. Mow turf grass to a height of 2 to 2½ inch.
D. Turf Post fertilization: Apply commercial fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m)
to turf area.
3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
Michael Langston, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 6
1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.7 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.
Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify
Owner before each application is performed.
B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat
already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of
vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted
areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and
remove after plantings are established.
D. Remove non-degradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
3.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until
acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:
1. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 32 92 00
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 1
SECTION 33 32 13 - SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the submersible non-clog pumps, related
piping, supports, and all other necessary appurtenances as shown on the drawings and
specified in these specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, technical data, and pump curves in accordance with Section
01 33 00. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78
23.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All pumps shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Non-clog Pumps shall be
KSB or approved equal.
1.4 PUMP WARRANTY
A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being supplied to the owner against
defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5) years. Warranty period
shall begin on the date of project substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install three (3) submersible non-clog sewage pumps
for the existing lift station. Each pump shall be furnished with a stainless steel lifting
cable per manufacturers recommendations based off of wet well depth and a
minimum of 40-60 feet of hypalon jacketed type SPC cable, P-MSHA approved and
sized according to N.E.C. and ICEA standards.
2.2 REQUIREMENTS
Primary Design Point 814 GPM @ 75’ TDH
Minimum Efficiency at Primary Design Point 20%
Maximum Motor Horse Power 25
Voltage 460
Minimum Motor Service Factor/Insulation Class 1.15/ Class F
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 2
Minimum Pump Solids Passing Capability 3”
Motor Rating FM Explosion Proof
Minimum Motor Rating/Starts per Hour 15
Minimum Motor Bearing Life Guarantee 50,000 hours
(at any usable portion of the pump curve)
Pumps shall be KSB model # KRT E 100-253/184XEG-S or approved equal
2.3 PUMP DESIGN
A. The pumps shall be capable of handling raw, unscreened sewage. The discharge
connection elbow and discharge piping are existing. The pumps shall be
automatically connected to the discharge connection elbow when lowered into place,
and shall be easily removed for inspection or service. There shall be no need for
personnel to enter the wet well to gain access to the pumps. Sealing of the pumping
unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accomplished by a simple linear
downward motion of the pump. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of
the pump unit. The entire weight of the pumping unit shall be guided by no less than
two guide bars and pressed tightly against the discharge connection elbow. No
portion of the pump or the guide support system other than the discharge connection
shall bear directly on the floor of the sump. The pump, with its appurtenances and
cable, shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of
watertight integrity to a depth of 65 ft.
2.4 PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A. Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35B, with smooth surfaces
devoid of blow holes and other irregularities. Where watertight sealing is required,
o-rings made of nitrile rubber shall be used. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of
AISI type stainless steel 316 construction. All surfaces coming into contact with
sewage, other than stainless steel, shall be protected by a factory applied spray
coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with an epoxy resin paint finish
on the exterior of the pump. The impeller and seal plate must be constructed of
“wear resistant chromium white iron, no exceptions.
B. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted
with nitrile rubber o-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by
metal-to-metal contact between machine surfaces. This will result in controlled
compression of nitrile rubber o-rings without the requirement of a specific torque
limit. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical o-rings, grease
or other devices shall be used.
2.5 CABLE ENTRY SEAL
A. The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a
watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall be comprised of a single
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 3
cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit
against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed by
the entry body containing a strain relief function, separate from the function of
sealing the cable. The assembly shall bear against a shoulder in the pump top. The
cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a terminal board, which
shall isolate the motor interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump
top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered
acceptable.
2.6 MECHANICAL SEAL
A. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical rotating shaft seal system.
Seals shall run in an oil reservoir. Lapped seal faces must be hydro-dynamically
lubricated at a constant rate. The lower seal unit, between the pump and oil chamber,
shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant
tungsten carbide ring. The upper seal unit, between the oil sump and motor housing,
shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant
tungsten carbide ring. Each interface shall be held in contact by its own spring
system. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment but shall be
easily inspected and replaceable. The seals shall be capable of operating in either
clockwise or counter clockwise direction without damage or loss of seal.
B. The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable or equal to the dual
independent seal specified: shaft seal without positively driven rotating members, or
conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double
spring acting between the upper and lower units. Cartridge type seal systems shall not
be acceptable.
C. Each pump shall be provided with an oil chamber for the shaft sealing system. The
oil chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and to provide lubricant
expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plug, with positive anti-leak seal shall
be easily accessible from the outside. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped
media for lubrication. The motor shall be able to operate continuously while non-
submerged without damage while pumping under load.
2.7 BEARINGS
A. The pump shaft shall rotate on at least two permanently lubricated bearings with an
L-10 bearing life of 50,000 hours when operating at any usable portion of the pump
curve at maximum product speed. The upper motor bearing shall be a single ball type
bearing to handle radial loads. The lower bearing shall be a two row angular contact
ball bearing to handle the thrust and radial forces. Single row lower bearings shall not
be acceptable.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 4
2.8 PUMP SHAFT
A. Pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft is an extension of the
motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The pump shaft shall be carbon steel
C1035 and completely isolated from the pumped liquid or AISI type 431 stainless
steel.
2.9 IMPELLER
A. The impeller shall be of wear resistant chromium white iron, dynamically balanced,
double shrouded non-clogging design having a long thrulet without acute turns. The
impeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other
matter found in normal sewage applications. The impeller shall be of a full vane
design. The pump manufacturer shall, upon request, furnish mass moment of inertia
data for the proposed impeller. The impeller shall be capable of passing a minimum
3 inch solid sphere. The fit between the impeller and the shaft shall be a sliding fit
with one key.
2.10 VOLUTE
A. The pump volute shall be a single piece gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, non-
concentric design with smooth passages of sufficient size to pass any solids that may
enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified.
B. A wear ring shall be installed to provide efficient sealing between the volute and
impeller. The wear ring shall be a stationary ring made of nitrile rubber molded with
a steel ring insert, which is drive fitted to the volute inlet and rotating stainless steel
AISI 316 ring which is drive fitted to the impeller skirt.
2.11 MOTOR DESIGN
A. The pump motor shall be a NEMA H design, induction type with a squirrel cage
rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation rated for 180°C (356°F). The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is not acceptable. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40°C (104°F) and capable of up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of cast aluminum. Thermal switches set to open at 125°C (260°F) shall be embedded in the stator lead coils to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection and shall be connected to the control panel. The junction chamber shall be sealed off from the stator housing and shall contain a terminal board for connection of power and pilot sensor cables using threaded compression type terminals. The use of wire nuts or crimp-type connectors is not acceptable. The motor and the pump shall be produced by the same manufacturer.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 5
B. The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific
gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of
plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40°C (104°F)
ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 80°C. A performance chart shall
be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, power factor,
input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and no-
load characteristics.
C. The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and shall
be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The
outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chloroprene rubber. The motor and
cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of
watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet.
D. All pump motors shall be FM approved (Explosion Proof) rated for use in Class 1,
Groups C & D, Division 1 hazardous locations.
E. The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading
throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through run-out.
2.12 PROTECTION
A. All stators shall incorporate thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature of
each phase of the winding. Should high temperature occur, the thermal switches shall
open, stop the motor, and activate an alarm.
B. A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect water in the stator chamber or pump seal
chamber. The Float Leakage Sensor (FLS), a small float switch, shall be used to
detect the presence of water in the stator chamber. When activated, the FLS will stop
the motor and activate an alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall install equipment as required by the manufacturer's written
installation instructions and approved shop drawings unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
B. Excess motor and control wire shall be carefully coiled and hung inside the wet well.
These wires shall not be cut and all identification tags shall be in place. Cables shall
be supported with S.S. basket weave type strain reliefs hung in wet well and be
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 6
routed in a manner that will not interfere with access to any equipment or terminals in
the control panels.
3.2 SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be supplied by the contractor for each of the pump
stations:
(1) Set of upper and lower shaft seals
(1) Set of upper and lower bearings
(1) O-ring kit
(1) Volute wear ring
(1) Impeller wear ring
(1) Oil inspection port o-ring
3.3 PUMP TEST
A. The pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each
pump before shipment from factory:
1. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be checked for
compliance to the customer's purchase order.
2. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects
shall be made.
3. Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish correct rotation
and mechanical integrity.
4. The pump shall be run for 30 minutes submerged under a minimum of six (6)
feet under water.
5. After operational test No. 4, the insulation test (No. 2) is to be performed
again.
B. A written report stating the foregoing steps have been done shall be supplied with
each pump at the time of shipment upon request.
C. The pump cable end will be sealed with a high quality protective covering, to make it
impervious to moisture or water seepage prior to electrical installation.
END OF SECTION 33 32 13
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS 33 32 14 - 1
SECTION 33 32 14 – LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place into service the electrical control
panel and control system components related to the in-plant pump station.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL PANELS
A. The control panel shall be NEMA 4X SS enclosure with powder coated white
finish. All cabinet hardware shall be stainless steel. The cabinet shall be sized to
accommodate the equipment required, plus 25% space.
B. Nameplates shall be furnished for the front panel mounted instrument. All
instruments and components shall be tagged on rear with embossed plastic tape
labels.
C. Wiring, where required, shall be general-purpose open type, neatly bundled and
laced or installed in plastic wiring troughs. Wire shall be stranded No. 14 AWG
minimum, with thermoplastic insulation rated for 600V and 90 degrees.
F. All wires entering and leaving the panel shall be terminated at barrier type
terminal strips with surge protection. All terminals shall be tagged and identified.
G. All power, analog, and digital signals shall be protected from surges at the control
panel with suitable surge suppression devices. Panel mounted surge protection
shall be DIN rail mounted with plug in style protectors to allow for easy
replacement. In addition, surge protection devices shall have indicator lights to
indicate if the unit is still operational. Surge suppression shall be manufactured by
Phoenix Contract or acceptable equivalent.
H. All piping and/or wiring installation shall be executed in a workmanlike manner,
and shall be grouped, bundled, supported and routed horizontally and vertically, to
provide a neat appearance.
I. The completed panel shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The factory test
results shall be provided to the Engineer prior to shipment. Field installation by
the Contractor shall consist only of setting the panel in place and making
necessary electrical connections.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS 33 32 14 - 2
J. The control panel shall be built in UL approved production in accordance with UL
Guidelines and Standards. The control panel shall bear a UL label. The panel
production facility shall have the following UL certifications: UL 508.
2.2 PANEL MOUNTED DEVICES
A. Indicating lights to be heavy duty, push-to-test type, oil tight, industrial type with
integral transformer for 120 VAC applications. Lenses shall be colored as noted
on drawings or as required by the equipment manufacturers if not specified on the
drawings. Legend plates shall be factory engraved as required. Lights shall be
Allen-Bradley 800H or acceptable equivalent.
B. Momentary pushbuttons to be heavy duty, oil tight, industrial type with full guard
and momentary contact rated at 10 Amps continuous at 120 Vac. Legend plates
shall be factory engraved as required. Pushbutton shall be Allen-Bradley 800H or
acceptable equivalent.
B. Selector switches, on/off and H.O.A. to be heavy duty, oil tight, industrial type
with contact rated at 120 VAC, 10 amps continuous service. Legend plates shall
be factory engraved as required. Switches shall be Allen-Bradley 800H or
acceptable equivalent.
C. All relays shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 750, or acceptable equivalent. Units
shall be hermetically sealed in metal can with octal plug. Contacts to be
120Vac/60Hz at 10 amps. Unit to incorporate lamp in parallel with relay coil.
All relays to be DPDT. Provide hold down clamps for all relays, and MOV
suppressor module.
D. The panel shall be provided with spare parts, one part for each type or model used.
Multiple panels or multiple items need not exceed 10% of the products installed
within the panel. Required spares: 1 combination starter, 2 sets of fuses, 1 set of
circuit breakers and 2 float switches.
E. All exterior control panels designed for exterior mounting shall be provided with
equipment rated for 60º Celsius.
F. Laminated schematics shall be provided inside each control panel for maintenance
purposes.
G. All motor starters shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley or acceptable
equivalent. All starters shall be across the line type, NEMA rated. No IEC
devices shall be allowed.
H. H-O-A selector switches are required for each motor starter.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS 33 32 14 - 3
I. Runtime meters and indicator lights that a motor starter is running are required for
all motor starters.
J. Provide 480V primary / 120V secondary control power transformer mounted
within enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the service personnel during
construction, testing, and acceptance of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and devices for the work shall be installed in the locations shown
on the drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in
compliance with the requirements of these specifications.
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Include all changes and/or alterations in the control panels prior to final inspection
and acceptance by the owner.
END OF SECTION 33 32 14
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB
111803.10 LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS 33 32 14 - 4
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 1
SECTION 40 05 13.54 - DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
required to install ductile iron pipe and fittings complete, tested, and ready for use, as
shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK (REQUIREMENTS)
A. Construction Drawings, Agreement Declarations, Exhibits and other Technical
Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, within twenty (20) calendar days
after receipt of Notice to Proceed, a list of materials to be furnished, and the names of
the suppliers and the date of delivery of materials to the site.
B. Submit shop drawings to the ENGINEER for review, showing the complete laying plan
of all pipe, including all fittings, adapters, valves, and specials along with the
MANUFACTURER's drawings and specifications indicating complete details of all
items. The pipe details shall include a pipe class laying schedule which specifies pipe
class, class coding, joints, station limits, and transition stations, and a list of abbreviated
terms with their full meaning. The pipe class laying schedule shall also show the
required bedding class as required for the pipes pressure class and bury depth according
to the specifications herein. The CONTRACTOR shall provide details of fittings to be
furnished. The above shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval before
fabrication and shipment of these items. The locations of all pipes shall conform to the
locations indicated on the Drawings. In most cases, a certain amount of flexibility in
the positioning of pipes will be allowed. Horizontal and vertical deflections may
require beveled, special deflection; or short pipes. The deflections at joints shall not
exceed 75 percent of that recommended by the MANUFACTURER.
C. Furnish in duplicate to the ENGINEER, prior to each shipment of pipe, submit
MANUFACTURER’s certification and certified test reports that the pipe and linings
and coating for this contract was manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASTM
and ANSI/AWWA Standards specified herein.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 2
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished by MANUFACTURER’s who are
fully experienced in the U.S. for the manufacture of the material to be furnished. The
pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the
best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be from a single MANUFACTURER. All
ductile-iron pipe to be installed under this contract may be inspected at the foundry for
compliance with these specifications by an independent testing laboratory provided by
the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall require the MANUFACTURER's cooperation
in these inspections. The cost of foundry inspection of all pipe approved for this
contract will be borne by the OWNER.
B. Inspection of the pipe will also be made by the ENGINEER or other representatives of
the OWNER after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on
account of failure to meet any of the specification requirements, even though pipes may
have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after
delivery shall be marked for identification and shall immediately be removed from the
job.
C. Each joint of ductile iron pipe 30” and larger shall be hydrostatically tested at the point
of manufacture to 75% of the 42,000 psi minimum yield strength for ductile iron pipe
for a duration of at least ten (10) seconds. Testing may be performed prior to
machining bell and spigot. Failure of ductile iron pipe shall be defined as any rupture
of pipe wall. Certified test certificates shall be furnished in duplicate to the
ENGINEER prior to time of shipment. The standard 500 psi hydro test will be
performed on 24” and smaller pipe.
1.6 CONNECTION TO EXISTING LINES
A. For connections to the existing lines to which the piping of this Contract must connect,
the following work shall be performed:
1. Exposed buried lines to confirm or determine end connection, pipe material, and
diameter.
2. Furnish and install appropriate piping and make proper connections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings 3-inches through 54-inches for buried service shall meet
the following requirements:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 3
1. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.51 and AWWA C151. Ductile iron
pipe shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi with a minimum yield
strength of 42,000 psi and a minimum elongation of 10 percent. Thickness of
pipe supplied shall not be less than Pressure Class 150 unless specifically
indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
2. Unrestrained joint pipe shall be supplied in lengths not in excess of 20 feet.
Unrestrained joint pipe shall be either the rubber-ring type, push-on joint, or
standard mechanical joint pipe as manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe
Co., U.S. Pipe and Foundry, or equal.
3. Rubber gaskets shall conform to ANSI A21.11 for mechanical and push-on type
joints. Mechanical joint fittings and restrained joint pipe shall be furnished with
sufficient quantities of accessories as required for each joint.
4. All below ground fittings shall be restrained mechanical or restrained push-on
joints and shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, C110/A21.10, ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or
C111/A21.11 where applicable. Push-on joints for such pipe shall be in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Pipe thickness shall be designed
in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and C151/A21.51. Restrained
joints shall be designed to withstand vertical and longitudinal forces and be
capable of holding against withdrawal with no axial movement resulting from an
internal hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi.
5. Restrained pipe joints that achieve restraint by incorporating cut out sections in
the wall of the pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness at the point of cut out
that corresponds with the minimum specified wall thickness for the rest of the
pipe.
6. Restrained push-on type pipe joints and fittings shall be suitable for 150 psi
working pressure for purpose as specified above and fabricated of heavy section
ductile iron casting. Gaskets shall meet the material requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C111 for mechanical joint gaskets. Bolts and nuts on mechanical
joint pipe and fittings, below ground shall be low alloy, high strength steel equal
to "Corten" conforming to ANSI A21.11 and A21.15 for Class 125 ANSI B16.1
for the purpose intended. Bolts and nuts on flanged joint pipe and fittings shall be
316 stainless steel. Restrained push-on type joints and fittings for buried pressure
piping shall be as listed below:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe – Flex Ring: 4” – 48”
b. American Cast Iron Pipe – Lok Ring: 42” – 64”
c. U.S. Pipe and Foundry – TR Flex: 4” – 64”
d. U.S. Pipe and Foundry -- U.S. Pipe HP Lok: 30"-64"
e. Engineer Approved Equal
The minimum number of restrained joints required for resisting forces at fittings
and changes in direction of pipe shall be determined from the length of restrained
pipe on each side of fittings and changes in direction necessary to develop ade-
quate resisting friction with the soil as shown on the drawings.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 4
7. Adapters to connect ductile iron fittings to pipe or fittings of dissimilar materials
shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the pipe
MANUFACTURER recommendations, and as approved by the ENGINEER.
8. Pipe outlets where shown shall be made with tees, or factory welded-on outlets
for above ground piping. Welded-on outlets shall be ductile iron, factory welded
on ductile iron pipe having a minimum Pressure Class 250 for 16-inch to 36-inch
sizes and Pressure Class 250 for 42-inch to 64-inch sizes.
9. Flexible joint pipe shall be ball and socket type self-restraining without the use of
bolts and designed for a maximum working pressure of 250 psi having a class
rating as recommended by the MANUFACTURER. Boltless restraint shall be
achieved by external lugs interlocked into a retainer gland. Each joint shall be
capable of a maximum deflection of 15 deg. Flexible joint pipe shall be USIFLEX
by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Flex-Lok Boltless Ball Joint Pipe by
American Cast Iron Pipe Company or equal. Subaqueous canal crossings shall be
either flexible ball-and-joint pipe or Class 53 factory restrained joint pipe, fitting
and accessories.
10. All fittings shall be cast and machined at one foundry location to assure quality
control and test data. The standard grade of iron shall be 70-50-05. Analyses of
the ductile iron shall be made with the chemical limits set in this standard (C110
and/or C153). Results of chemical analyses shall be provided to the ENGINEER
as part of the shop drawings.
B. Ductile iron pipe and fittings 3-inches through 54-inches for above ground service or in
below ground concrete pits shall meet the following requirements:
1. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.51 and AWWA C151. Thickness of
pipe shall be a minimum of Class 53 for all sizes of flanged pipe.
2. Flanged ductile-iron pipe shall conform to current AWWA/ANSI Specification
C115/A21.15 and C110/A21.10 with factory-applied screwed long hub flanges
except as otherwise specified hereinafter. Flanges shall be fully machined faced
and drilled after being screwed tight on the pipe, with flanges true to 90 degrees
with the pipe axis and shall be flush with end of pipe conforming to ANSI B61.1,
125 pound std. or Class 250, for the purpose intended. No welding of flanges or
accessories in the field will be acceptable.
3. Wall sleeve with integral water stops, or wall pipe casings with integral thrust
collars shall be continuously welded on each side of the waterstop or thrust collar
and shall be of the sizes and types as shown on the Drawings. Wall sleeves,
where specified, shall be fabricated of Schedule 40 Type 304 stainless steel or
PVC and shall have integral water stops continuously welded on each side of the
waterstop. Seal strips for wall shall be included with all sleeves and shall be Link
Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan, or equal. For wall
sleeves over 36 inches in diameter dual sealstrips shall be provided.
4. Full face type 1/16-inch thick red rubber ring gaskets shall conform to ANSI
A21.11. Ring gaskets shall be of approved composition suitable for the required
service.
5. Pipe and fittings exposed to view in the finished work and to be exterior painted
shall not receive the standard tar or asphalt coat on the outside surfaces but shall
be shop primed on the outside. Should portions of the pipe inadvertently be given
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 5
the outside bituminous coating instead of the rust inhibitive primer as required for
exposed piping the surfaces shall be sealed with a non-bleeding sealer coat
compatible with the specified primer as evidenced by the Manufacturer’s
published information. Sealing shall be a part of the work of this section.
6. Bolts and nuts on flanged pipe and fittings shall be 316 stainless steel and shall be
drilled to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125 or 250 flanges for the purpose intended.
2.2 LINING AND COATINGS
A. All ductile iron pipe and fittings for wastewater service (including but not limited to raw
sewage lines, and all process lines up to the filters including pressure and gravity mains,
unless otherwise noted, shall have an epoxy phenolic lining on the interior and
bituminous coating on the exterior except for 6 inches back from the spigot end. The
bituminous coating shall not be applied to the first 6 inches of the exterior of the spigot
ends. All pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without asphalt,
cement lining, or any other lining on the interior surface. Because removal of old
linings may not be possible, the intent of this specification is that the entire interior of
the pipe and fittings shall be as cast without ever having been lined with any substance
prior to the application of the specified lining. Any pipe or fittings furnished for this
project must not have been lined prior to the awarding of the contract for this project.
1. Lining Material - Interior coating shall be Permox-CTF as manufactured by
Permox or Series 431 Perma-Shield as manufactured by Tnemec. Interior lining
shall be applied per manufacturer specifications.
2. The following are the minimum requirements to be met:
a. A permeability rating of zero permeance when a film of at least 40 mils is
tested according to ASTM D1653 or a permeability rating of 0.0 perms
when measured using Method A of ASTM E66 procedure A with a test
duration of 42 days.
b. The material shall contain at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz
pigment in the dried film.
c. The following test and rating/method must be run on ductile iron panels
with the results certified by the lining material supplier of the material being
submitted.
1) Direct Impact: ASTM D2794
2) 3% Sulfuric Acid Immersion @ 120/F: ASTM D714
3) 25% Sodium Hydroxide Immersion @ 140/ F: ASTM D714
4) Deionized Water Immersion @ 160/ F: ASTM D714
5) Moisture and Ultraviolet Light Cycle 8 Hours Light / 4 Hours 100%
Humidity: ASTM G5377
3. Application of Lining – The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with at
least a five-year history of applying linings to the interior of ductile pipe and
fittings.
a. Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blasting the entire area which will
receive the protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any
areas where oil, grease, or any substance which can be removed by solvent
is present shall be solvent cleaned using the guidelines outlined in
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 6
SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning. After the surface has been made free of
grease, oil, or other substances, all areas which are to receive the protective
compounds shall be abrasive blasted using compressed air nozzles with
sand or grit abrasive media. The blast media shall strike 100 percent of the
surface area at sufficient force to remove rust and oxides. The entire
surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that all rust, loose,
oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and specks of
tightly adhering oxides may be left on the surface. Any area where rust
appears before coating must be re-blasted to remove all rust.
b. Lining: After surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation
of the barrel of the pipe from the inside shoulder of the gasket groove to the
end of the interior spigot shall receive a minimum coating of 40 mils dry
film thickness of the protective lining. If flange fittings or pipe are included
in the project the linings must not be used on the face of the flange;
however, full face gaskets must be used to protect the ends of the pipe. All
fittings shall be lined with a minimum of 40 mils of the protective lining.
Push-on type fittings shall be lined from the gasket groove to the gasket
groove. The 40 mils system shall not be applied in the gasket grooves.
c. Coating of Gasket Groove and Spigot Ends: Due to the tolerances involved,
the gasket groove and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the
spigot end must be coated with a minimum of 10 mils dry of coating. This
coating shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should be taken
that the coating is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket groove or on
the spigot end. All materials for the gasket groove and spigot end shall be
applied after the application of the lining.
d. Number of Coats: The number of coats of lining material applied shall be
as recommended by the lining MANUFACTURER. However, in no case
shall the material be applied above the dry thickness per coat recommended
by the lining MANUFACTURER in printed literature. The time between
coats shall never exceed that time recommended by the lining material
MANUFACTURER. If at any time the lining must be recoated beyond the
lining material MANUFACTURER's recommended recoat time, the surface
of the existing lining shall be roughened sufficiently to prevent
delamination between coats.
4. Inspection:
a. All pipe shall be checked for thickness using a magnetic film thickness
gauge. The thickness testing shall be done using the method outlined in
SSPC-PA-2 film thickness testing.
b. The barrel of all pipe and fittings shall be pinhole detected with a
nondestructive 2,500-volt pinhole test.
c. Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked with the date of application of
the lining system and with its numerical sequence of application on that
date.
5. Certification: The pipe or fitting MANUFACTURER must supply a certificate
attesting to the fact that the Applicator met the requirements of this specification,
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 7
that the material used was as specified, and that the material was applied as
required by the specification.
6. Repair: All pinholes and damaged lined areas shall be repaired in accordance
with written repair procedure furnished by the MANUFACTURER of the lining
material so that the repaired area is equal in performance to the undamaged lined
areas.
7. Pipe and fittings exposed to view in the finished work and to be painted shall not
receive the standard tar or asphalt coat on the outside surfaces but shall be shop
primed on the outside. Should portions of the pipe inadvertently be given the
outside bituminous coating instead of the rust inhibitive primer as required for
exposed piping the surfaces shall be sealed with a non-bleeding sealer coat
compatible with the specified primer as evidenced by the Manufacture’s
published information. Sealing shall be a part of the work of this section.
8. All exposed pipe and fittings shall be painted with the Owner’s standard color for
each type of process pipe and labeled with the type of process flow (WAS, RAS,
MLR, AIR, etc.) along with a flow directional arrow at a maximum spacing of
every 10 feet in plain view.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be marked with the name of the
MANUFACTURER, size, and class. All gaskets shall be marked with the name of the
MANUFACTURER, size, and proper insertion directions.
B. All above and below ground ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have an identification
color code.
1. Raw sewage force mains and gravity sewer pipe - Green.
2. Reclaimed Water pipe – Purple.
3. Reject Effluent – Green
C. All buried ductile iron pipe shall be painted along its entire length with 2-inch stripes on
at least three quarter points for pipe sizes 12-inches and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All mains shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the pipe
MANUFACTURER and as specified herein.
B. Care shall be taken in the handling, storage, and installation of pipe and fittings to pre-
vent injury to the pipe or coatings. All pipe and fittings shall be examined before
installing, and no pipe shall be installed which is found to be defective. Pipe or fittings
shall not be dropped. All damage to the pipe coatings shall be repaired according to the
MANUFACTURER's recommendations.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 8
C. All pipe and fittings shall be kept clean and shall be thoroughly cleaned before
installation.
D. Pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with bedding and
backfill as shown on the Drawings. Blocking under the pipe will not be permitted.
E. When installation is not in progress, including lunchtime, or the potential exists for dirt
of debris to enter the pipe, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed with watertight
plugs or other approved means.
F. Under no circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench.
G. All plugs, caps, bends and other locations where unbalanced forces exist shall be
anchored by restrained joints. The length of pipe for which restrained joints shall be
used are shown on the Drawings.
H. In all cases where ductile iron pipe is installed, a marking tape shall be located above
the top of the pipe.
I. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth
cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be jointed with a bell shall
be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Cement lining shall be
undamaged.
3.2 PUSH-ON JOINTS
A. Push-on joints shall be made in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the
groove of the bell end of the pipe, and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated. The
plain end of the pipe to be laid shall then be aligned and inserted in the bell of the pipe
to which it is to be joined, and pushed home with a jack or by other means. After
joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to make certain that the rubber gasket is
correctly located.
3.3 MECHANICAL JOINTS
A. Thoroughly clean and lubricate the joint surfaces and rubber gasket with soapy water
before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened to the specified torques. Under no conditions
shall extension wrenches or pipe over handle of ordinary ratchet wrench be used to
secure greater leverage.
3.4 FLANGED JOINTS
A. Flanged joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
Extreme care shall be exercised to insure that there is no restraint on opposite ends of
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 9
pipe or fitting which will prevent uniform gasket compression, cause unnecessary
stress, bending or torsional strains to flanges or flanged fittings. Adjoining push-on
joints shall not be assembled until flanged joints have been tightened. Bolts shall be
tightened alternately and evenly.
3.5 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Restrained joints shall be installed at all fittings as shown on the Drawings and specified
herein. The joint assemblies shall be made in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's
recommendations. After installation, apply a heavy bitumastic coating to all bolts, nuts
and accessories.
3.6 FLEXIBLE JOINT PIPE
A. The flexible joint pipe shall be installed in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's
recommendations. In addition, the installed deflection shall be limited to 15 deg. per
joint and provisions shall be made where required to prevent flotation or buoyancy of
the pipe.
3.7 SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Couplings shall be installed where shown. Couplings shall not be assembled until
adjoining push-on joints have been assembled. After installation, apply a heavy
bitumastic coating to all bolts, nuts and accessories.
3.8 CLEANING
A. At the conclusion of the work the CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all of the new
pipelines.
END OF SECTION 40 05 13.54
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 10
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 1
SECTION 40 05 13.55 – POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and fittings for potable and reuse water line.
2. Underground pipe markers.
3. Bedding and cover materials.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Construction Drawings, Agreement Declarations, Exhibits and other Technical Specification
Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe
(SDR Series).
2. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals.
3. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
4. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic
Pipe.
B. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C605 - Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water.
2. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In.
Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
D. Preconstruction Photographs:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 2
1. Submit digital files of colored photographs of Work areas and material storage areas.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust
restraints, and invert elevations.
C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted
utilities.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Mark valve body with manufacturer's name and pressure rating.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Block individual and stockpiled pipe lengths to prevent moving.
C. Do not place pipe or pipe materials on private property or in areas obstructing pedestrian or
vehicle traffic.
D. Store PVC materials out of sunlight.
1.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify field measurements prior to ordering pipe.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER PIPING
A. PVC:
1. Comply with AWWA C900, Class 165.
2. Fittings: Comply with AWWA C153.
a. Coating and Linings:
1) Bituminous Coating: Comply with AWWA C110
2) Cement Mortar Lining: Comply with AWWA C104, double thickness
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 3
3. Joints:
a. Mechanical and Push on Joints: Comply with AWWA C111.
2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS
A. Trace Wire:
1. Electronic detection materials for nonconductive piping products.
2. Unshielded, 10 AWG, THWN-insulated copper wire.
3. Conductive tape.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Bedding and Cover:
1. Soil Backfill from above Pipe to Finish Grade:
a. Soil Type S1.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Restrained Joints: As specified in Drawing details.
B. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets:
1. Comply with ASTM A36 (A36M) or ASTM A307.
2. Grade A carbon steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify that existing utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation preparation.
B. Preconstruction Site Photos:
1. Take photographs along centerline of proposed pipe trench; minimum one photograph for
each 100 feet (15 m) of pipe trench.
2. Show mailboxes, curbing, lawns, driveways, signs, culverts, and other existing Site features.
3. Include Project description, date taken, and sequential number on back of each photograph.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 4
C. Pipe Cutting:
1. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, and remove burrs.
2. Use only equipment specifically designed for pipe cutting; use of chisels or hand saws is not
permitted.
3. Grind edges smooth with beveled end for push-on connections.
D. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
E. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Bedding:
1. Excavation:
a. Excavate pipe trench as specified in Section 31 23 17 - Trenching for Work of this
Section.
b. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Dewater excavations to maintain dry conditions and to preserve final grades at bottom of
excavation.
3. Provide sheeting and shoring as specified in Section 31 23 17 - Trenching.
B. Piping:
1. Install pipe according to AWWA C605.
2. Handle and assemble pipe according to manufacturer instructions and as indicated on
Drawings.
3. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets: Coat buried steel with one coat of coal tar coating
before backfilling.
4. Maintain 6 feet (3 m) horizontal separation of water main from sewer piping according to
F.A.C. 62-555.314.
5. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.
6. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
7. Close pipe openings with watertight plugs during Work stoppages.
8. Cover:
a. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 feet of cover.
b. Measure depth of cover from final surface grade to top of pipe barrel.
9. Pipe Markers:
a. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe.
b. Coordinate with trench Work as specified in Section 31 23 17 - Trenching.
C. Backfilling:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 5
1. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill in minimum lifts of 6 inches, tamp in
place, and compact to 95 percent of maximum density.
2. Place and compact material immediately adjacent to pipes to avoid damage to pipe and
prevent pipe misalignment.
3. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction
density.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Install pipe to indicated elevation within tolerance of 5/8 inch (20 mm).
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
B. Pressure test system according to AWWA C600 and following:
1. Test Pressure: Not less than 150 psi.
2. Conduct hydrostatic test for at least two hours.
3. Slowly fill section to be tested with water; expel air from piping at high points. Install
corporation cocks at high points. Close air vents and corporation cocks after air is expelled.
Raise pressure to specified test pressure.
4. Observe joints, fittings, and valves under test. Remove and renew cracked pipes, joints,
fittings, and valves showing visible leakage. Retest.
5. Correct visible deficiencies and continue testing at same test pressure for additional two
hours to determine leakage rate. Maintain pressure within plus or minus 5 psi (34.4 kPa) of
test pressure. Leakage is defined as quantity of water supplied to piping necessary to
maintain test pressure during period of test.
6. Compute maximum allowable leakage using following formula: L = SD x sqrt(P)/C L = testing allowance, gph (L/h) S = length of pipe tested, feet (m) D = nominal diameter of pipe, inches (mm) P = average test pressure during hydrostatic test, psig (kPa) C = 148,000 (794 797)
When pipe under test contains sections of various diameters, calculate allowable leakage from sum of computed leakage for each size.
7. Leakage:
a. If test of pipe indicates leakage greater than allowed, locate source of leakage, make
corrections, and retest until leakage is within allowable limits.
b. Correct visible leaks regardless of quantity of leakage.
C. Compaction Testing for Bedding: Comply with ASTM D1557.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 6
END OF SECTION 40 05 13.55
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 GATE VALVES 40 05 23.15 - 1
SECTION 40 05 23.15 - GATE VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient-seated gate valves.
2. General duty gate valves smaller than 3 inches.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
2. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24 - Metric/Inch
Standard.
3. ASME B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.
B. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
2. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
3. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
4. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
D. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
2. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP-70 - Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
2. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 GATE VALVES 40 05 23.15 - 2
B. Product Data:
1. Submit catalog information, indicating materials of construction and compliance with
indicated standards.
C. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. American Flow Control.
2. Clow
3. Kennedy
4. M&H
5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
6. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.
B. Description:
1. AWWA C509 3” -12”.
2. AWWA C515 14” – 16”
3. Minimum Working Pressure: 250 psig at 100 degrees F.
4. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 300 degrees F.
5. End Connections: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.42, flanged or Mechanical joint.
C. Operation:
1. Non-rising stem 3” to 30” w/ nut for buried applications.
2. Non-rising stem 36” to 48” w/ bevel gear operator and nut for buried applications
3. Non-rising stem 2” to 20” w/ handwheel for exposed applications.
4. Non-rising stem 24” to 48” w/ bevel gear operator and removable handwheel for exposed
applications. Handwheel attached to nut with captive cotter pin.
D. Materials:
1. Wedge: Resilient ASTM A126, cast iron, fully encapsulated with Buna-N.
2. Body and Disc: ASTM A126, cast iron, Buna-N coated.
3. Stem, Stem Nuts, Glands, and Bushings: ASTM B584, bronze.
4. Connecting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.
2.2 GENERAL-DUTY GATE VALVES - SMALLER THAN 3 INCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 GATE VALVES 40 05 23.15 - 3
B. 2 inches and Smaller:
1. MSS SP 80, Class 150.
2. Body and Trim: ASTM B62, bronze.
3. Bonnet: Threaded or Union.
4. Operation: Handwheel.
5. Inside screw with back-seating stem.
6. Wedge Disc: Solid; ASTM B62, bronze.
7. Alloy seat rings.
8. End Connections: Solder or threaded.
C. 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:
1. MSS SP 70, Class 125.
2. Stem: Non-rising.
3. Body: ASTM A126, cast iron.
4. Trim: Bronze.
5. Bonnet: Bolted bonnet.
6. Handwheel, outside screw and yoke.
7. Wedge Disc: Solid, with bronze seat rings.
8. End Connections: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.42, flanged.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. See drawings for required installation accessories.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.
B. Testing: Test gate valves according to AWWA C509.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Support valves in plastic piping to prevent undue stresses on piping.
END OF SECTION 40 05 23.15
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 GATE VALVES 40 05 23.15 - 4
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PLUG VALVES 40 05 23.21 - 1
SECTION 40 05 23.21 - PLUG VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Eccentric plug valves.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
2. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24 - Metric/Inch
Standard.
3. ASME B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.
B. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
2. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
D. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C517 - Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit catalog information, indicating materials of construction and compliance with
indicated standards.
C. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PLUG VALVES 40 05 23.21 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dezurik.
2. Substitutions: None Allowed.
3. Furnish materials according to MAWSS standards.
B. Description:
1. Type: Non-lubricated, eccentric.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig at 300 degrees F.
3. Ports: Port area shall be 100% of nominal pipe area.
4. Stem Bearings: Self-lubricating.
5. Stem Seals: Neoprene; V-ring type.
6. Packing and Gland: Accessible and externally adjustable.
7. End Connections: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.42, flanged.
C. Operation:
1. 3 inches and Smaller: Lever.
2. Greater than 3 inches: Worm gear manual operators with handwheel.
3. Furnish gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chainwheel operators for valves
mounted over 5 feet above floor.
D. Materials:
1. Body: AWWA C517, cast iron, lined with elastomer as recommended by valve
manufacturer for service conditions.
2. Plug: Hard Rubber, lined with resilient coating as recommended by valve manufacturer for
service conditions.
3. Seats: Nickel.
4. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel.
5. Stem Bearings: Stainless steel.
6. Seals: PTFE.
7. Connecting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.
E. Finishes: As specified in MAWSS standards.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.
B. Performance Testing:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PLUG VALVES 40 05 23.21 - 3
1. Operate each valve and actuator from fully CLOSED to fully OPEN to fully CLOSED under
no-flow conditions.
C. Leakage Testing:
1. Test at indicated working pressure to ensure valves are drip-tight. Test with pressure in both
directions for five minutes each way.
D. Hydrostatic Testing:
1. Perform test at twice rated pressure. Test for at least one minute to ensure no leakage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves according to AWWA C517 and as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Install plug valves in horizontal piping with stem horizontal; install plug valves in vertical piping
with plug at top when closed.
C. Install such that plugs are on top when OPEN and on pressure side when CLOSED.
END OF SECTION 40 05 2321
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PLUG VALVES 40 05 23.21 - 4
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 1
SECTION 40 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Pipe markers.
5. Labels.
6. Lockout devices.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in Wastewater Facilities
specified by this Section.
2. Section 46 05 53 – Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color-coding for mechanical
identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and
valve manufacturer's name and model number.
D. Samples: Submit one tag, label, and pipe marker for each size used on Project.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 2
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
installation.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Qualifications Statement:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance
materials.
B. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.
C. Tools: Furnish special crimpers and other devices required for Owner to reinstall tags.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.
B. Perform Work according to Wakulla County standards.
C. Maintain 1 copy of each standard affecting the Work of this Section on-Site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Provide manufacturer recommended nameplate data.
2. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 3
B. Description: Aluminum with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color.
2.2 TAGS
A. Metal Tags:
1. Description:
a. Aluminum or Stainless-steel construction; stamped letters.
b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 1-1/2 inches; square with finished edges.
B. Information Tags:
1. Description:
a. Clear plastic with printed CAUTION and message.
b. Minimum Tag Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inch.
c. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
2. Tag Chart: Typewritten, letter-size list of applied tags and location, in anodized aluminum
frame.
2.3 STENCILS
A. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.
B. Description:
1. Clean-cut symbols.
2. Letters:
a. Up to 2-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2-inch-high letters.
b. 2-1/2- to 6-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch-high letters.
c. Over 6-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4-inch-high letters.
C. Stencil Paint: Semigloss enamel.
D. Color-Coding and Lettering Size: Conform to ASME A13.1.
2.4 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color-Coding and Lettering Size: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers:
1. Description:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 4
a. Factory-fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic.
b. Preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering.
c. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:
1. Description: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:
1. Description:
a. Brightly colored, continuously printed plastic ribbon tape.
b. Minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick.
c. Manufactured for direct burial service.
2.5 LABELS
A. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.
B. Description:
1. Aluminum construction.
2. Minimum Size: 1.9 by 0.75 inches.
3. Adhesive backed, with printed identification.
2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES
A. Lockout Hasps:
1. Description:
a. Anodized aluminum construction.
b. Furnish hasp with erasable label surface.
c. Minimum Size: 7-1/4 by 3 inches.
B. Valve Lockout Devices:
1. Description:
a. Steel construction.
b. Furnish device preventing access to valve operator and accepting lock shackle.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation
preparation.
B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
C. Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in
Wastewater Facilities.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals
in Wastewater Facilities.
B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive.
D. Labels:
1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
E. Tags:
1. Install tags using corrosion-resistant chain.
2. Number tags consecutively by location.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried
pipe.
G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
H. Piping:
1. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers.
2. Use tags on piping 3/4-inch diameter and smaller.
3. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
4. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
5. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs, including risers and drops,
adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at
each obstruction.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 6
END OF SECTION 40 05 53
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 40 05 63.01 - 1
SECTION 40 05 63.01 - BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubber-seated ball valves.
2. Plastic ball valves.
3. Tapping sleeves and valves.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Construction Drawings, Agreement Declarations, Exhibits and other Technical
Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings.
B. ASME International:
1. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
2. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch
Standard.
3. ASME B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.
4. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends.
2. MSS SP-60 - Connecting Flange Joints between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 40 05 63.01 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and
inspections.
D. Preconstruction Photographs:
1. Submit digital files of colored photographs of Work areas and material storage areas.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections,
thrust restraints, and invert elevations.
C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted
utilities.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Mark valve body with manufacturer's name and pressure rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER-SEATED BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Henry Pratt Company.
2. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.
3. Engineer Approved equal
4. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
5. Furnish materials according to specification and Wakulla standards.
B. Smaller Than 4 Inches:
1. Comply with MSS SP 110.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig at 150 deg. F.
3. Maximum Process Fluid Temperature: 300 deg. F.
4. Body:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 40 05 63.01 - 3
a. Type: One piece.
b. Material: Stainless steel.
5. Ball: Stainless steel.
6. Port: Full.
7. Seats: Buna-N.
8. Stem: Blowout proof.
9. End Connections: Threaded.
10. Operator: Stainless Steel hand lever or Pneumatically actuated. Refer to manufacturer
recommendation for each installed ball valve
2.2 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
A. Tapping Sleeves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. JCM Industries, Mueller Company, or equal.
b. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2. Description:
a. Material: Ductile iron or cast iron.
b. Type: Dual compression.
c. Outlet Flange Dimensions and Drilling: Comply with ASME B16.1, Class 125 and
MSS SP-60.
B. Tapping Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Mueller Company, U.S. Pipe Valve & Hydrant Company, or equal.
b. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2. Description:
a. Comply with AWWA C500.
b. Type: Double disc with non-rising stem.
c. Inlet Flanges: Comply with ASME B16.1, Class 125 and MSS SP-60.
d. Mechanical Joint Outlets: Comply with AWWA C111.
3. Mark manufacturer's name and pressure rating on valve body.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Restrained Joints: As specified in Drawing details.
B. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets:
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 40 05 63.01 - 4
1. Comply with ASTM A36 or ASTM A307.
2. Grade A carbon steel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
B. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. According to MSS SP-110 and MSS SP-60.
B. Tapping Sleeves and Valves:
1. As indicated on Shop Drawings and according to manufacturer instructions.
C. Thrust Restraints:
1. Install tie rods, clamps, setscrew retainer glands, or restrained joints as indicated on
drawings.
2. Protect metal-restrained joint components against corrosion by applying a bituminous
coating or encasing metal area using concrete mortar.
3. Install joint restraint at dead ends of water main.
END OF SECTION 40 05 63.01
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-1
SECTION 40 90 00 – SYSTEMS INTEGRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. 40 91 23 – Field Instruments
2. 40 94 50 – Process Loop Descriptions
3. 40 95 13 – Control Panels and Hardware
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The CSI shall be responsible for integrating the furnished equipment, material, and
software into a fully operational plant-wide control system. All components shall meet
the requirements of these specifications.
B. The CSI shall work directly for the Contractor and is responsible for integrating
selected components, PLCs, and incorporating process equipment control systems into
the plant SCADA system.
C. PSI’s shall work directly for their respective process equipment provider and be
responsible for coordinating with the equipment provider to control the equipment and
coordinate with the CSI for communications with the SCADA system. Process
Equipment is defined as: Effluent Discharge Area Valves, In Plant Pump Station, In
Tank Screw Screen, Alum Feed System, Waste Dump System, Magnetic Flow Meter,
Turbidity Meter, etc.
1. Note: The PSI will be designated by the individual process equipment manufacturer
and may be different for each process equipment.
D. The CSI shall provide services as defined herein and shown on the Drawings including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Develop the control algorithms and code.
2. Develop the HMI graphics for the SCADA system modifications.
3. Develop System Reports.
4. Integrate all of the system components and packaged system data in to the plant
control system.
5. Implement the design and functionally test for each process unit in scope of
contract.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-2
6. Provide system wide Factory Acceptance Testing and Field Acceptance Testing.
7. Communicate and coordinate with the Contractor on the project construction,
installation, and testing schedules.
8. Provide operator and maintenance training on the operation and maintenance of the
plant control system.
9. Provide field start-up services during the construction period to ensure all devices
are properly installed and configured.
10. Field test all I/O points and control algorithms for compliance with the function
requirements specification, project plans, and project specifications.
11. Provide operation and maintenance manuals for the plant control system.
12. Provide archived system configuration files for disaster recovery purposes.
13. Post Start-Up Services to ensure operation of the facility after initial start-up and
for “As-Built” documentation functions.
E. The PSI’s shall provide services as defined herein and shown on the Drawings
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Provide and install all instrumentation associated with process equipment.
2. Fiber-to-Ethernet converters within process equipment panels that require
connection to the main SCADA System. Converters shall be coordinated with the
CSI prior to purchase to ensure proper communication between the process panels
and the SCADA System.
3. Provide all required communication devices between process equipment panels and
sub-panels.
4. Communicate with CSI for common plant-wide communication hardware and
protocols.
5. Coordinate with the CSI for type and style of logic code for all programming.
6. Coordinate with the CSI for the SCADA and HMI software used for the plant. All
programming and HMI screens associated with process equipment controls shall
be compatible with the same plant SCADA & HMI system.
7. Provide the Owner and CSI with all associated HMI screens (in digital form), I/O
list, data tags, address tables, etc. associated with their corresponding process
equipment for incorporation into the overall plant-wide SCADA/HMI system.
8. Calibration and start-up of all instruments associated with process equipment.
9. All miscellaneous items required for a complete and fully operational process
system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CSI – Control Systems Integrator
B. HMI – Human Machine Interface
C. PLC – Programmable Logic Controller
D. PSI – Process Systems Integrator
E. SCADA – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-3
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Shop Drawing submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
2. Manufacture of the SCADA System shall not commence until related submittals
have been approved by the Owner & Engineer.
3. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in complete packages grouped to permit review
of related items as generally outlined in Paragraph 1.4B.1, below.
4. Review of Shop Drawings will be for conformance with Contract Documents and
with regard to functions specified to be provided.
5. Final and approved copies of all Shop Drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD
format on a CD-ROM.
B. Submittal Requirements
1. Product information for all sensors/transducers and field and panel instruments.
Include the following:
a. Manufacturer's product name and model number.
b. Instrument tag number from Contract Documents.
c. Manufacturer’s standard catalog product data.
d. Description of construction features.
e. Performance and operation data.
f. Installation and mounting details, instructions and recommendations.
g. Service requirements.
h. Dimensions.
i. Range of each device and calibration information.
j. Descriptions of materials of construction and a listing of NEMA ratings for all
equipment.
C. Panels, Consoles and Cabinets Information
1. Layout Drawings include the following:
a. Front, rear, and internal panel views to scale.
b. Dimensional information.
c. Tag number and functional name of components mounted in and on panel,
console or cabinet.
d. Product information on all panel components.
e. Nameplate location and legend including text, letter size and colors to be used.
f. Location of anchoring connections and holes.
g. Location of external wiring and/or piping connections.
h. Mounting and installation details.
i. Proposed layouts and sizes of graphic display panels.
j. Calculations for heating and cooling.
k. Subpanel layouts and mounting details for all items located inside control
panels.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-4
l. Calculations of estimated electrical power demand and expected run time of the
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
2. Wiring and/or piping diagrams include the following:
a. Name of panel, console or cabinet.
b. Wiring sizes and types.
c. Piping sizes and types.
d. Terminal strip numbers.
e. Color coding.
f. Functional name and manufacturer's designation for components to which
wiring and piping are connected.
3. Electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79 Standards for all circuits
indicated in the Contract Documents. No typical wiring diagrams will be acceptable
and no tables or charts to describe wire numbers will be acceptable.
4. Stock list or Bill of Materials for each panel including tag number, functional name,
manufacturer’s name, model number and quantity for all components mounted in
or on the panel or enclosure.
D. Computer Consoles
1. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the overall size of the console with
the available floor space. A floor plan with all furniture, control panels, and the
console system shall be produced by Contractor and submitted for review that
includes all items specified herein.
2. The console supplier shall provide design and application support by:
a. Determining the console functional design requirements. Coordinate with the
relative equipment suppliers to ensure that all equipment specified to be
mounted in console is installed correctly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
3. Layout Drawings include the following:
a. Shall be prepared using AutoCAD.
b. Front, rear, end and plan views to scale.
c. Dimensional information.
d. Construction materials.
e. Product information on all console components.
f. Stock lists or Bill of Materials for each console.
g. Location of anchoring connections and holes.
h. Location of external wiring connections.
i. Mounting and installation details.
4. Panel internal point-to-point wiring diagrams, include the following:
a. Name of console.
b. Wiring sizes, types, and numbers.
c. Terminal strip and post numbers for all interconnections.
d. Color coding.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-5
e. Functional name and manufacturer's designation for components to which
wiring and piping are connected.
5. Submit samples of specified finish materials (work surface with nosing, available
paint colors) to the Engineer for review and selection.
6. The Supplier of the console system shall be responsible for the sizing of the
modular components to accommodate the computer equipment. This coordination
shall be presented in the submittal.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. SCADA System
1. System Description
a. Detailed block diagram showing system hardware configuration and identifying
model numbers of system components.
b. Software language and organization.
c. Format, protocol and procedures for data highway communications and local
communications with input/ output modules and peripheral devices.
d. Human-machine interfacing details.
e. Control and failure modes.
f. On-line and off-line capabilities for programming, system utilities and
diagnostics.
g. Input/output point listing with I/O module cross-reference identification for
each distributed controller.
h. Data base listing including all input/output points.
i. Suggested detailed format and configuration of all log reports, alarm
summaries, printer outputs, screen displays and graphics.
j. List of spare parts and test equipment.
2. Equipment Hardware
a. Layout drawings showing front, rear, end and plan views to scale of all
processing equipment, I/O components, power supplies and peripheral devices.
b. Construction details, features and procedures.
c. Interconnection diagrams including termination details, cable identification list
and cable length.
d. Plans showing equipment layout in control panels.
e. Installation requirements, instructions and/or recommendations.
3. Software Description
a. Standard technical documentation covering all aspects of the distributed control
system software functions and capabilities, including instruction set description
and programming procedures related to control, monitoring, display, logging,
reporting and alarming functions.
b. Standard technical and instructional documentation covering software for
utility, system support, system documentation, display, communications, data
logging and storage and diagnostic functions.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-6
c. Detailed functional descriptions of application programs explaining control,
display, logging and alarming features to be provided and functions to be
performed.
d. Documentation describing memory type, size and structure and listing size of
system memory, I/O and Data Table memory and size of memory available for
control programs. Also, define estimated control program memory
requirements and processor execution times and program scan times to perform
the display, logging, reporting and alarm functions required.
e. Documentation describing central monitoring station main and secondary
memory types, size and requirements to perform the display, logging, reporting
and alarming functions required.
f. Documentation for all PLC programming and Human Machine Interface (HMI)
software configuration including features and capabilities, screen display and
printout examples of a fully annotated and cross-referenced ladder diagram and
the ladder diagram elements.
g. Documentation of all PLC programs including the databases to establish
communication between the PLC and SCADA System that are provided
independent of this Contract.
4. System Software Documentation
a. Prepare and submit two copies of preliminary software documentation at least
four weeks prior to the expected initiation of factory testing and shall include
the following as a minimum:
1) Complete hard copies of all ladder diagram and function block program-
ming. Documentation shall include complete external and internal I/O coil,
contact and signal cross-referencing, addressing and rung numbering. Doc-
umentation shall clearly distinguish between internal and real I/O and shall
also incorporate extensive English language to identify contact, coil and
signal functions and for labeling and description of program, sub-program
and rung purpose and action.
2) Complete listing of external and internal I/O address assignments, register
assignments and preset constant values along with functional point descrip-
tions. Also, list all unused/undefined I/O and data table registers available.
3) Complete hard copies of all program documentation for all types of pro-
grams.
4) Detailed system memory map defining memory segments used and spare
memory segments available for system memory, I/O tables, Data Tables and
control program.
5) Complete database listing including listings for log, report and alarm file
setups.
6) Hard copies of all system graphic displays and formats for all logs, reports
and the alarm summary.
7) User's manuals describing procedures and providing examples for use of
operator's consoles, workstations and programming terminal, accessories
and system utility routines to perform control, display and logging program
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-7
generation, program modification, program verification, diagnostics, pro-
gram documentation, loading and backup and other required system support
functions.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. SCADA I/O Loop Wiring Diagrams
1. Prepare drawings on a module-by-module basis and include the following
information:
a. Rack numbers, slot number, module type and module terminal point numbers.
Also, include location and identification of all intermediate panel terminal
block and strip numbers to which I/O wiring and power supply wiring is
connected. Identify all power supply circuit numbers and ratings.
b. Wiring sizes, types, wire numbers and color-coding.
c. Location, functional name, tag numbers and manufacturer model numbers of
panel and field devices and instruments to which I/O wiring is connected. For
discrete I/O devices use NFPA 79 electrical symbols tagged with designation
as shown.
d. Manufacturer’s data sheets and catalog literature.
e. Description of on-line diagnostic tests and off-line tests.
f. Dimensional data of equipment.
g. Addressing card and system layout, including special configuration rules and
limitations.
h. Interface and cable data.
i. Hardware manuals.
j. Electrical characteristics and protection provided for each component.
k. Indicated modularity of I/O modules.
l. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for grounding and power conditioning
requirements.
m. Description of how faults are detected, isolated and corrected.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (Each of these shall be custom written by the
Integrator):
1. Control System Operations Manual
2. Control System Maintenance Manual
3. Laminated Trouble Shooting Guides for both the Operators and the Maintenance
Staff
C. Record Drawings and Documentation:
1. Contractor and CSI shall revise all system Shop Drawings, submittals and software
documentation to reflect as-built conditions in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents and the supplemental requirements below.
2. Copies of all revised Shop Drawings and documentation shall be submitted to the
Engineer to replace outdated drawings and documentation contained in the System
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-8
Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Half-size black line sets shall be provided for
all drawings larger than 11 by 17-inches. Specific instructions for outdated drawing
removal and replacement shall be provided with the Record Drawing submittal.
3. Half-size black line prints of wiring diagrams applicable to each control panel shall
be placed inside a clear plastic envelope and stored in a suitable print pocket or
container inside each control panel.
4. Updated electronic copies of Record Drawings and Documentation will be
provided in AutoCAD format or the original software. These drawings shall
include loop sheets, system block diagrams, starter schematics, and P&IDs. The
drawings shall indicate all wiring numbers.
5. The CSIs shall provide detailed documentation of all computer code developed for
this project. This documentation shall include but not be limited to: flow charts,
written descriptions, comments in PLC code, and HMI scripting. All software and
code developed for this project shall be considered property of the Owner.
6. All As-Built documentation shall be provided in both paper and electronic formats
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. The SCADA System shall be furnished by a single Supplier who shall assume
responsibility for providing a complete and integrated system.
2. All equipment, components and materials required shall be furnished by the single
Supplier who shall assume the responsibility for adequacy and performance of all
items.
3. The Supplier shall identify those system components, which are not of their
manufacture.
4. The Supplier shall supply its company's Quality Assurance Plan, and for
components that are not of its manufacture, the component manufacturer's Quality
Assurance Plan. The plans shall include but not necessarily be limited to: method
of testing, raw material criteria, methods of documentation, station control,
"Burn-In", final tests and serialization coding and packaging.
B. Supplier's Minimum Qualifications:
1. Be a financially sound firm having at least five years continuous experience in
designing, implementing, supplying and supporting instrumentation and control
systems that are comparable to the SCADA System in terms of hardware, software,
cost and complexity.
2. Have manufactured and supported standard lines of digital processing and control
equipment and application software continuously for the last five years.
3. Have in existence at the time of bid, an experienced Engineer and technical staff
capable of designing, implementing, supplying and supporting the SCADA System
and handling the SCADA System submittal and training requirements.
4. Provide system hardware components and software packages of fully developed,
field proven standardized designs and therefore shall furnish a system that is not a
highly unique, custom one-of-a-kind system.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-9
5. Have a minimum of five years’ experience in hardware application and
programming of distributed microprocessor based controllers and data highway
systems.
6. Provide standard course offerings in general process control applications and in
operation, programming and maintenance of the control system and equipment at a
facility specifically utilized for training purposes. The facility shall have been in
operation continuously for the last two years.
7. Have a thorough working knowledge of wastewater treatment processes and control
philosophy in accordance with standard practices of the wastewater treatment
industry.
8. Have a system of traceability of the manufactured units and purchased components
through production, assembly and testing.
9. Have a system of "Burn-In" for all components and available supportive
documentation.
10. Have a demonstrated record of prompt response to field failures.
11. Have a documented program of failure analysis.
12. Have or will use a UL approved panel shop.
13. Have a record of prompt shipments in accordance with contract obligations required
for previous projects.
C. Supplier's Responsibility:
1. Contractor shall retain the ICS Supplier to undertake the responsibilities specified
below. However, execution of these specified duties by the system supplier shall
not relieve Contractor of the ultimate responsibility for the ICS.
a. Design, fabrication, and implementation of the ICS and all subsystems in
accordance with the Contract Documents and all referenced standards and
codes.
b. Preparation, assembly and correction of all ICS submittals in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
c. Proper interfacing of the ICS hardware, field devices and panels, including
required interfacing with packaged control systems furnished by other
equipment suppliers, and with the plant electrical system.
d. Supervision of the installation of ICS, instruments, panels, consoles, cabinets,
wiring and other components required.
e. Calibration, testing and start-up of the ICS.
f. Training of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of the monitoring
and control system.
g. Handling of all warranty obligations for the control system components.
h. Maintenance of two reproducible copies of the complete system and running
software at the Supplier's facility for the duration of the warranty period.
Software copies shall be maintained on the bulk storage medium used by the
Supplier for system program development and shall be directly loadable on the
supplied system.
i. Programming of the PLC’s used in the SCADA System in accordance with the
Process Loop Descriptions provided in Section 40 94 50.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-10
D. Reference Standards:
1. The following organizations have generated standards that are to be used as guides
in assuring quality and reliability of components and systems; govern
nomenclature; define parameters of configuration and construction, in addition to
specific details in the Contract Documents:
a. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society, (ISA).
b. National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST).
c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL).
d. American Water Works Association, (AWWA).
e. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association, (NEMA).
f. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA).
g. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI).
h. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA).
i. Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association, (SAMA).
j. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex “D” Standards, (NFPA).
k. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, (IEEE).
l. National Electrical Code, (NEC).
E. The following are the approved as Control Systems Integrator for the project:
1. Automation Control Services, LLC
6281 Technology Drive
Pensacola, FL 32505
(850) 477-8440
2. Southern Flow, Inc.
6445 Industrial Way
Suite A
Alpharetta, GA 30004
(770) 667-5169
3. Control Instruments, Inc.
5253 Oakdale Rd SE
Smyrna, GA 30082
(404) 351-1085
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS (NOT USED)
1.9 TRAINING
A. The CSI shall plan, schedule and conduct a thorough and comprehensive training
program designed to meet the general and specific needs of the Owner’s operating and
maintenance personnel. The training program shall include training on the completed
system at the Owner's site.
B. Training, except that conducted during start-up and maintenance visits by service
technicians, shall be conducted by professional training specialists employed by the
instrumentation and CSI.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-11
C. The Integrators shall submit a training syllabus to the Engineer as a shop drawing for
approval.
D. As a minimum the Integrators shall provide the following classes for the treatment
facility operators and maintenance staff for operational training and maintenance
trouble shooting.
1. CSI: (1) 8-hour classes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the CSI during construction, testing, start-up,
calibration and acceptance of the instrumentation and control system. The Contractor
is responsible for a complete and fully operational instrumentation and control system.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. The instrumentation and control system, peripherals, and accessory equipment shall be
installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and located as
shown on the Contract Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation, placing and location of system
components, their connections to the process components, panels, cabinets and devices,
as required to complete the work subject to the Engineer's approval. The Contractor
shall be responsible to insure that all field wiring for power and signal circuits between
existing devices, the proposed control system are correctly done in accordance with
best industry practice to insure a satisfactory functioning installation
3.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. PLC/HMI PROGRAMMING
1. All PLC code shall be written in either “Function Block” style. The CSI may use
“Ladder Logic” for simple logic functions with the Engineer and Owner’s approval
prior to programming.
2. All PLC / HMI code shall be supplied to the Owner with fully descriptive
comments. All HMI code shall be supplied to the Owner with fully descriptive
screen and tag data.
3. The Integrator shall provide the Owner with a flow chart of all PLC code as well
as a written algorithm of the codes functions.
4. The graphic standards to be used for all HMI equipment shall be coordinated with
the Process Equipment Providers. All control panel screens will be custom.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-12
5. The Integrator shall provide the Owner with an I/O map of all process variables in
the PLC.
6. All PLC code shall be the property of the Owner.
7. The Contractor shall provide three copies of all commented PLC, HMI, and
Operator Interface code/script/screen layouts to the Owner in electronic format
prior to acceptance by the Owner. Any documentation not containing symbol
information or comments will not be considered acceptable.
B. HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) / REPORTING
1. The Human-Machine Interface software for the SCADA HMI shall be based upon
the existing installation and shall be field verified. The CSI shall be responsible for
providing all necessary licenses, drivers, and required network and software
packages as required, for the configuration as detailed in the project plans. The
Integrator shall be required to provide the necessary HMI screens to monitor and
control the equipment installed in this project. The Integrator shall be required to
submit the proposed HMI screens to the Engineer and Owner for approval a
minimum of eight weeks prior to the factory testing.
2. All available functions represented on the screens shall be easily identified. The
Operator shall not be required to navigate multiple levels of menus to perform a
control function.
3. All alarms generated by equipment installed on the project shall be displayed in the
alarm summary page. The Integrator shall coordinate with the Owner when
configuring the system alarms and subsequent actions. The use of HMI alarm tags
will not be allowed unless sufficient reason is submitted and approved.
3.4 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The Engineer and Owner shall witness Acceptance Tests, On-site Operability Tests and
System Acceptance Tests.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and devices for the instrumentation and control system shall be installed
in the locations shown on the drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and in compliance with the requirements of these specifications.
B. The CSI shall provide installation assistance in their bids. The Contractor shall provide
one instrument electrician to work with the integrator during the installation and
termination of the wiring to the PLCs.
3.6 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. No power shall be activated to any part of the instrumentation and control system until
the Engineer receives a written certified statement by the system supplier that the
installation is complete and ready for energizing. The Contractor is responsible for
proper coordination and scheduling, and any damage to the instrumentation and control
system.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-13
B. After the installations are completed, the Contractor, shall test each component of the
instrumentation and control system. After all systems are operating properly, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer and demonstrate the full operation of the system.
The Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments and correct or replace faulty
equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. The CSI shall be required to provide all test equipment necessary to test the control
system and computer networks per industry standards.
3.7 FIELD CALIBRATION
A. All instrumentation and controls shall be calibrated in the presence of the Engineer in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to the accuracy specified.
B. The Contractor shall provide field calibration as necessary until the project is
considered Substantially Complete by the Engineer.
3.8 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PERIOD
A. General:
1. During the first year of operation after substantial completion of the entire project,
the Contractor shall provide maintenance and calibration services for the newly
installed instrumentation and control systems.
2. All maintenance and calibration activities shall conform to the manufacturer's
requirements and shall be provided by a certified technician.
3. This work shall include all labor, tools, equipment, materials and all other expenses
at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Calibration and maintenance shall be performed every three months at a minimum.
5. The CSI shall include 40 man-hours per quarter for the required maintenance
period.
3.9 START-UP SERVICES
A. The CSI shall include 40 man-hours for Start-up in their bids. These hours will be on
site. Any hours not used for Start-up shall be used for Owner-directed field
programming changes. The Contractor shall provide one instrumentation technician to
work with the integrator during the Start-up time.
END OF SECTION 40 90 00
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-14
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-1
SECTION 40 91 23 – FIELD INSTRUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Related Sections:
1. 40 90 00 Systems Integration
2. 40 94 00 Process Loop Description
3. 40 95 13 Control Panels and Hardware
1.2 SUMMARY
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up and place
into satisfactory operation all field instruments.
1.3 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration
1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Furnish primary sensors and field instruments by the named manufacturers or equal
equipment by other manufacturers.
2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality
and performance of the equipment to be supplied.
3. Obtain all sensors and field instruments of a given type from the same
manufacturer.
4. The primary sensors and field devices shall be interchangeable with similar
function existing primary sensors and field devices to minimize spare parts
inventory.
Manufacturers' Responsibilities and Services:
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-2
1. Design and manufacture the primary sensors and field instruments in accordance
with the applicable general design requirements specified in Section 40 90 00
System Integration and the detailed Specifications herein.
2. Field supervision, inspection, start-up and training in accordance with the
requirements of Section 40 90 00 System Integration.
Performance requirements
1. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.
2. Operating Temperature: 32° F to 104° F.
3. Environment: Wastewater.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances
before installation.
Delivery, storage and handling
1. Deliver units as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping
limitations, with protective crating and covering.
2. Lift and support units with the manufacturer’s designated lifting and covering.
Coordination and scheduling
1. Coordinate with the Owner for the location of areas.
2. Coordinate the Dissolved Oxygen System with process equipment manufacturer
for exact placement.
3. Coordinate with the pipe provided for flow meter sizes.
4. Coordinate level range of level transmitters with intended application range and
tank/basin provider.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Endress-Hauser
2. Hach
3. Wallace & Tierman
4. Siemens Milltronics
5. Rosemount
6. Ashcroft
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-3
2.2 TURBIDITY METER
Range: 0.01 – 4000 NTU
Signal Output: 4 to 20 mA
2.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER
Measured Error: +/- 0.2%
Temp Range: -5 to 50 degrees Celsius
Liner: Hard Rubber
Pressure Class: ANSI B 16.5 Class 150
Headloss: 0 PSI
Display Range: 5 digits with sign and units
Signal Current: 0 to 3000 nA
Signal Output: 4 to 20 mA
Display: LC, Backlit, 4 lines, 16 characters each
Size: As shown on mechanical drawings
2.4 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS
Range: 125mm – 40 meters
Blocking Distance: 0 –3 meters
Temperature Range: -40 to 80 degrees Celsius
Material: PVDF
Transmitter Supply Voltage: 115VAC +5% -10%
Signal Output: 4 to 20 mA
Relay Outputs: 5 Form ‘C’ contacts
Applications: Flow, Level, volume, pump control
Housing: IP65
Operating Temperature: -20 to 60 degrees Celsius
2.5 WARRANTY
The equipment shall be warranted for a period of one year after the installation.
Components failing to perform as specified by the engineers, or as represented by the
manufacture, or proven defective in service during the warranty period, shall be
replaced, repaired or satisfactorily modified by the manufacture without cost to the
Owner when returned to the manufacture.
2.6 SURGE PROTECTION
Each electronic transmitter shall be provided with a Phoenix PLUGTRAB SPD for both
the power and the 4-20 mA signal in a NEMA 4X stainless steel hinged junction box
adjacent to the transmitters.
Provide signal isolators for 4-20mA signals within control panel.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION
Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.
Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section
“Contract Closeout”.
Demonstrate operation of products specified in this Section. Conduct walking tour of
the Project. Briefly identify location and describe function, operation, and maintenance
of each product.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP
All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations and conform to the Contract Documents.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
Contractor shall install required electric conduit and cables for all field instruments.
Each electric field instrument shall be supplied with 3#12 in a 1”C to the nearest power
panelboard unless otherwise indicated on the project drawings. In addition, 2-2#18
AWG shield pairs of signal wire in a 1”C shall be provided to the nearest PLC plant
control panel unless otherwise shown on the project drawings.
Each pump shall be provided with a discharge pressure gauge. The discharge pressure
gauge shall be connected to the piping system prior to the pump check valve. Each
pressure gauge shall be supplied with a stainless steel isolation valve and pipe nipple
for connection to the tapped pipe.
All pressure transmitters shall be installed using a stainless steel isolation valve and
stainless steel pipe nipple.
All transmitters shall be provided with sun/rain hoods.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including
grounding connections, according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening
values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-5
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer’s Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation and
electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
Contractor shall install all equipment and related accessories before having the
manufacturer’s field service. If additional trips are required due to incorrect
installation, Contractor shall pay for the costs for the field services.
3.6 DOCUMENTATION
Manuals: Provide the Owner with original copies of the installation, operation,
maintenance, and calibration manuals as provided with the equipment. In addition
provide the original warranty cards and product literature. Copies of this information
shall not be accepted.
END OF SECTION 40 91 23
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-1
SECTION 40 94 50 - PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. 40 90 00 – Systems Integration
2. 40 91 23 – Field Instruments
3. 40 95 13 – Control Panels and Hardware
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the general function and disposition of each primary process loop.
The CSI shall provide additional functions as needed to adhere to good control and
engineering practices.
B. The process loop descriptions are written descriptions of the basic configuration and/or
programming required to implement the sequential control of the wastewater reclamation
plant unit processes. Finalizing and tuning of strategies, as required, by the process
characteristics shall be accomplished during start-up.
C. The SCADA (supervisory control and data acquisition) system for the proposed plant
shall incorporate the design philosophies as described in the section. It shall be the
responsibility of the CSI to insure that these philosophies are engrained in the proposed
plant control system.
D. The SCADA system shall be implemented such that the operator has the ability to
monitor and control every device that is connected to the plant wide network from the
operator’s human machine interfaces (HMIs) and operator interface terminals (OIT).
E. The SCADA system shall provide the ability for the automated process control at each
process area or packaged system to continue to operate in the event of a network failure.
F. The SCADA system shall be implemented, such that the operator has the ability to
perform local control (‘HAND’ operation) in the event of a process area PLC failure.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Local – monitoring and controls located at the piece of equipment.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-2
B. Remote – monitoring and controls located away from the piece of equipment (such as an
MCC) and/or programmed in SCADA.
C. RUNNING – discrete input obtained from auxiliary contacts (or data link registers)
provided with the local motor control equipment (i.e., starter, VFC, RVSS, etc.) which
shall close (or change value) when the equipment is running.
D. HOA IN AUTO – discrete input obtained from a dry contact which indicates that the
remote HAND-OFF-AUTO (HOA) selector switch is in the “AUTO” position to permit
remote control by the SCADA system.
1. If the HOA is in “HAND”, all software functions associated with that specific
equipment shall not be available and PLC control of equipment shall be halted.
E. OOR IN REMOTE – discrete input obtained from a dry contact which indicates that the
local ON-OFF-REMOTE selector switch is in the “Remote” position to permit remote
control by the SCADA system.
F. FAULT – discrete input obtained from local motor overload and/or any other shut down
mode such as seal-fail, over-temperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc.
G. ESTOP – discrete input obtained from local emergency stop push button.
H. SPEED IN – analog input obtained from local VFC typically shown as 0 – 100%. Speed
range shall be operator adjustable under supervisory password control.
I. OPEN & CLOSED – discrete inputs obtained from limit switches indicating the position
of a valve either opened or closed.
J. HOA (hand-off-auto) – remote virtual selector-switch function that allows the operator
to select the mode of operation in either “HAND” (for remote manual control) or
“AUTO” (for remote PLC control).
1. If the local HOA is in the “AUTO”, this function shall allow the operator to select
to either control that equipment manually or allow the PLC to control automatically.
K. S/S (start/stop) – remote virtual pushbutton function that allows the operator to manually
start and stop equipment. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO” AND the remote
HOA is in “HAND”.
L. SPEED S/P (setpoint) – remote virtual numeric function that allows the operator to enter
a numeric value from 0 – 100% that sets the speed of the associated motor. If the operator
enters a value greater than 100%, the HMI or OIT shall display an error message and the
motor speed shall remain unchanged. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO” AND
the remote HOA is in “HAND”.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-3
M. OPEN/CLOSE – remote virtual pushbutton that allows the operator to manually open or
close a valve, gate, etc. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO” AND the remote HOA
is in “HAND”.
N. SELSW – remote virtual selector switch that allows the operator to manually select one
or more devices. Selector switch may have more than two selections depending on the
application. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO”. Availability in remote mode will
depend on application.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS ( NOT USED )
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ( NOT USED )
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ( NOT USED )
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ( NOT USED )
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS ( NOT USED )
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ( NOT USED )
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The SCADA system includes the following: process treatment equipment, power
distribution, motor controls, field instruments, HMI Software, HMI server, HMI
workstation, OITs, and a distributed control system.
B. The SCADA system shall allow the operator to monitor the operating status of all
equipment located on the plant that is connected to the SCADA system.
C. The SCADA system shall allow the operator to manually operate any piece of equipment
from any of the Workstations, Servers, or HMI displays located on the plant site.
1. OWNER will provide TCP/IP addresses to the CSI. Coordinate TCP/IP addresses
with Process Systems Integrators for status monitoring/controls as applicable.
D. The SCADA system shall allow the operator to easily change the operating set-points of
any piece of equipment that is automatically operated by the Control System. The
set-point ranges shall be hard coded such that the operator may not be allowed to enter a
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-4
set-point that allows the equipment to operate out of the range or limits set forth by the
equipment manufacturer. In addition the HMI shall have a configuration screen that
allows an operator with proper security privileges to reset each of the set-points to the
default values originally programmed in the system.
E. The SCADA system shall alarm the system operator when any equipment that was called
to run by the PLC fails to start or stops running for any reason.
F. The SCADA system shall alarm the system operator whenever an alarm condition is
present on any piece of equipment connected to the SCADA system. The CSI shall
coordinate with the OWNER to determine the desired priority level for all alarms as well
as call-out/paging sequencing.
G. Overall requirements of the system operation & SCADA system are as described in the
loop descriptions in these specifications and in the contract drawings.
H. The SCADA system shall automatically discover and re-configure the setting and
parameters of replacement devices connected to the control system network (i.e. variable
frequency controllers, solid-state overloads, soft starts, etc.)
I. The SCADA system shall provide the operator with a software management solution that
performs programmable logic controller program revision changes, programmable logic
controller program archival, network configurations, device configurations, and
programmable logic controller program track and archive software revisions.
3.2 ALARM CONDITIONS
A. All alarm conditions for the proposed equipment shall:
1. Notify the operator of the system alarms by providing audible notification as well
as displaying the alarm on the HMI with all of the associated alarm details.
2. Have the ability to be acknowledged through any of the HMI workstations or
operator interfaces connected to the SCADA system network.
3. Call the “on-call” operator in the event that the alarm is not acknowledged within
a period of time to be determined by the OWNER. In the event the “on-call”
operator does not acknowledge or clear the fault, the SCADA system shall continue
calling operators on the configured call-out list until the alarm is acknowledged or
cleared.
3.3 DATA ARCHIVAL
A. The SCADA system shall store each operation of every piece of equipment.
B. The SCADA system shall also store each start, stop, reset, logon, logoff, and alarm
acknowledgement that an operator performs.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-5
C. The SCADA system shall store the value of each analog and digital tag/variable such that
the operator can trend plant data.
3.4 EFFLUENT FLOW METER FE/FIT-6002
A. The SCADA System HMI shall be configured to display the following:
1. Instantaneous flow rates. 0 – 100% = 0 – XXX GPM (to be determined)
2. Totalized flow readings for the current 24-hour period, as well as the ability for the
operator to recall the totalized flow for any period over the past 12 months.
3. In the trending area of the HMI, the SCADA shall allow the operator to Trend both
instantaneous flow rates and totalized flow for a period of time of up to 12 months.
4. Flow indication FI-001 shall show the actual flow through the meter.
3.5 TURBIDITY METER AE/AIT-6001 AND AE/AIT-6004
A. The SCADA System shall monitor the turbidity of the water leaving the filters. The
operator shall have the ability to input two turbidity alarm levels (High Turbidity, High
High Turbidity). The “High Turbidity” level shall alarm the operator and provide time
for correction prior to reaching the “High High Turbidity”.
B. Once the “High High Turbidity” level is reached the Effluent Pumps shall be locked out
of service, and the effluent sent to the reject storage tanks until the turbidity reaches the
“High Turbidity” level.
C. The plant operator shall have the ability to turn off the automatic turbidity monitoring
system under password control and be prompted every hour on the hour for a manual
turbidity reading.
END OF SECTION 40 94 50
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-6
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-1
SECTION 40 95 13 – CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. 40 90 00 – Systems Integration
2. 40 91 23 – Field Instruments
3. 40 94 50 – Process Loop Descriptions
1.2 SUMMARY
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up and place into
satisfactory operation all control panels and enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 Systems Integration.
1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 Systems Integration.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards, Codes and Regulations
1. Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection of all equipment and
devices mounted within shall comply with applicable provisions of the following
standards, codes and regulations:
a. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex “D” Standards, (NFPA)
b. National Electrical Code, (NEC)
c. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards, (NEMA)
d. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM)
e. Operational Safety and Health Administration Regulations, (OSHA)
f. Underwriters’ Laboratory, Inc., (UL)
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-2
g. State and Local code requirements
h. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent
requirement shall apply.
2. All materials and equipment shall be new and all panels shall be built in an
Underwriters’ Laboratory, Inc. (UL) approved panel shop and bear the UL label.
B. General Design Requirements
1. Comply with the requirements of Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration.
C. Factory Assembly and Testing
1. All control panels shall be factory tested and certified prior to releasing for
shipment. The testing shall consist of, but not limited to, the following:
a. Point to point testing of all wiring prior to application of power
b. The intended supply voltage shall be applied to the control panel and all
components shall be tested for proper operation and calibration.
c. The programmable logic controller and operator interface code shall be loaded,
and each shall be tested for functionality.
d. All components shall be checked to confirm that each device has been installed
per the plans and specifications as well as the Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
e. The enclosure shall be inspected for defects and shall be repaired or replaced as
necessary.
f. All labeling and identification tags shall be verified, be clean and visible.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Furnish instruments and devices by the named manufacturers or equal equipment
by other manufacturers.
2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality
and performance of the equipment to be supplied.
3. Obtain all instruments or devices of a given type from the same manufacturer.
E. Manufacturers' Responsibilities and Services:
1. Design and manufacture the instruments and devices in accordance with the
applicable general design requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 Systems
Integration and specified herein.
2. Field supervision, inspection, start-up and training in accordance with the
requirements of Section 40 90 00 Systems Integration.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS ( NOT USED)
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all electrical and/or pneumatic components and devices, support hardware,
fasteners, interconnecting wiring and/or piping required to make the control panels
and/or enclosures complete and operational.
B. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made
and that there is ample room for servicing each item.
C. Components for installation on panel exterior shall be located generally as shown on
Drawings.
D. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the
panel to prevent any movement.
E. Provide sub-panels for installation of all relays and other internally mounted
components.
F. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other panels shall
be terminated at master numbered terminal strips, unless otherwise specified.
G. Provide copper grounding studs for all panel equipment.
H. Provide the following convenience accessories inside of each control panel:
1. One 120VAC/20A duplex, GFCI-type receptacle that is accessible from the interior
dead-front panel.
2. One or more 120 VAC fluorescent or LED light fixtures with protective plastic
shield to span across the width of the panel but not less than two-thirds the width
of the panel, as a minimum.
3. One 120 VAC, 20A, door switch to turn on the light.
4. Service light with switch and duplex receptacle shall have its own circuit breaker
and separate power feed.
I. A main circuit breaker shall be provided for each control panel. Sized as indicated on
the drawings.
J. Each control panel shall be provided with a series connected suppression filter system
to protect the programmable logic controller and instrumentation power from high-
frequency noise and electrical transients. The suppression filter shall be a current
technology LoadGuard or ENGINEER approved equal.
K. The bottom 12-inches of free standing panels shall be free of all devices, including
terminal strips, to provide ease of installation and testing.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-4
L. No device shall be mounted less than 36-inches above the operating floor level, unless
otherwise specified.
M. All control panels shall be designed to operate at the service voltage as indicated in the
project plans.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of panels and components
mounted therein as follows:
1. Nameplates shall be of 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic type with black matte
finish surface and white letter engraving.
2. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2-inch high letter engravings.
3. Panel mounted component (e.g., control devices, indicating lights, selector
switches, etc.) identification nameplates to have 1/4-inch high letter engravings.
4. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two stainless steel self-tapping
screws.
5. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag number and
descriptive title as shown and specified.
B. Tag all internally mounted instruments and devices in accordance with the following
requirements:
1. Tag numbers shall be as listed in the Contract Documents.
2. The identifying tag number shall be permanently etched or embossed onto a
stainless steel tag which shall be fastened to the device housing with stainless steel
rivets or self-tapping screws of appropriate size.
3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be
permanently attached to the device by a circlet of 1/16-inch diameter stainless steel
wire rope.
4. Identification tag shall be installed so that the numbers are easily visible to service
personnel.
5. Front of panel mounted instruments shall have the tag attached to rear of device.
C. Tagging of the following items shall be accomplished with the use of adhesive plastic
Brady USA, Inc. labels, or equal.
1. Tag all electrical devices (e.g., relays, timers, power supplies) mounted within
control panels and enclosures.
2. Tag all pneumatic lines.
3. Numerically tag all terminal blocks.
4. Numerically tag wiring at each end.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-5
2.3 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General:
1. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type specified.
2. Sizes shown on the Contract Drawings are estimates. CONTRACTOR shall furnish
panels and enclosures amply sized to house all equipment, instruments, front panel
mounted devices, power supplies, power distribution panels, wiring, tubing and
other components installed within, as required.
B. Construction Features:
1. Control panels located in field shall be NEMA 4X rated.
a. Panels shall be Type 316L stainless steel construction with a minimum
thickness of 12-gauge for all surfaces (except those areas requiring
reinforcement) having a smooth powder coated white painted finish.
b. Stainless steel screw clamp assemblies on three sides of each door.
c. Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of enclosure opening.
d. Hasp and staple for padlocking.
e. Provide a clear plastic, gasketed lockable hinged door to encompass all non-
NEMA 4 front of panel instruments.
C. All control panels shall be provided with a mild steel dead front panel capable of
protecting the operator from a bolted fault within the control panel with the outer door
open.
2.4 WIRING
A. Internal wiring shall be Type MTW stranded copper wire with thermoplastic insulation
rated for 600 V at 90ºC for single conductors, color coded and labeled with wire
identification. All wiring shall be clearly marked with an identification number
consistent with the wiring schematic.
B. Wire colors shall be as follows:
1. All ungrounded AC conductors operating at the supply voltage shall be “Black”
2. All ungrounded AC control conductors operating at voltage less than supply shall
be “RED”
3. All ungrounded DC control conductors shall be “Blue”
4. All ungrounded AC control conductors or wires that remain energized when the
main disconnect is in the “OFF” position shall be “Yellow”
5. All grounded AC current carrying conductors shall be “White”
6. All grounded DC current carrying conductors shall be “Blue with a White stripe”
7. All grounded AC current carrying conductors that remain energized when the main
disconnect is in the “OFF” position shall be “White with a Yellow stripe”
8. All ground conductors shall be “Green”
9. A wiring color code legend shall be mounted inside the control panel door.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-6
C. DC panel signal wiring: No. 18 minimum AWG shielded.
D. DC power wiring: No. 12 minimum AWG.
E. AC signal and control wiring: No. 14 minimum AWG. For wiring carrying more than
15A, use sizes required by NEC standards.
F. Separate and shield low voltage signal wiring from power and control wiring by a
minimum of 6-inches.
G. Group or bundle parallel runs of wire using covered troughs. Maximum bundle size
shall be 1-inch. Troughs shall have 40 percent spare capacity. Install wire troughs
along horizontal or vertical routes to present a neat appearance. Angled runs are not
acceptable.
1. Provide wire troughs manufactured by Panduit or equal.
H. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other movement.
I. Terminate all field wiring using compression type connectors (soldered type not
acceptable) at 600 V rated barrier type terminal strips and permanently affixed numeric
identifiers beside each connection. Identifiers to be self-stick plastic tape strips with
permanent type, machine printed numbers. For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips
shall be capable of handling No. 12 wiring (minimum).
1. Provide terminal blocks manufactured by Weidmuller, or equal.
J. All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from any one device, power
will not be disrupted to any other device.
K. All alarms generated external to the panel, spare alarm, and repeat contacts shall be
wired out to terminal blocks.
L. For internal component-to-component wiring only, compression type terminal blocks
are acceptable.
M. Terminal strips shall not be located closer than 8” from any side or bottom of the control
panel. This is designed to allow for adequate wire bending radius for field terminations.
N. Provide spare terminals equal in number to 20 percent of the terminals used for each
type of wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power).
O. Provide a separate terminal for grounding each shielded cable.
P. Use separate 5/16-inch diameter copper grounding studs for instrument signal cable
shields and AC power.
Q. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or
abrading of wire insulation.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-7
R. Wiring for devices mounted on the enclosure door or interior dead front panel shall be
run in spiral wrap to avoid pinch points when opening and closing the enclosure door(s)
or interior panels.
S. Provide fused terminal blocks, which will provide an LED indictor for a blown fuse.
Fused terminal blocks shall be manufactured by Schneider Electric / Square D or equal.
T. Provide complete wiring diagram showing "as-built" circuitry. Diagram shall be
enclosed in transparent plastic and placed in easily accessible pocket built into panel
door.
U. Din Rail shall be manufactured by Weidmuller or equal.
2.5 SURGE PROTECTION
A. Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system
from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The protection
systems shall be such that the protection level shall not interfere with normal operation,
but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance free
and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in suitable metallic cases, properly
grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth
ground and where practical each ground wire run individually and insulated from each
other. These protectors shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate
junction box (compatible with the area designation) coupled to the enclosure.
B. Panel mounted surge protection shall be plug-in style & DIN rail mounted to allow for
easy replacement. The power and digital I/O signals shall be protected with solid state
surge suppression devices manufactured by Phoenix Contact or ENGINEER approved
equal. MOV only type surge suppression is not acceptable.
C. All analog I/O signals shall be protected by loop powered isolators manufactured by
Phoenix Contact or ENGINEER approved equal.
D. Lightning Protection and surge suppression devices shall be provided for all radio and
telemetry equipment. The Lighting protection and surge suppression devices shall be
manufactured by Phoenix Contact or ENGINEER approved equal.
E. All incoming power to the control panel shall be protected by Phoenix Contacts
Trabtech surge protectors or ENGINEER approved equal rated for the voltage being
supplied. Protection shall be provided for all phase and neutral conductors.
2.6 PLC EQUIPMENT
A. All control panels that perform logic or control functions shall be provided with a
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC and associated I/O cards shall be:
1. Main CP: Compact Logix 1769
2. LCP’s: A-B Micrologix 1400
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-8
B. All PLC shall be supplied with a minimum of 2 Megabytes of available user memory
and shall be provided with a removable 64Megabyte CompactFlash card for nonvolatile
memory.
C. The PLC shall be provided with the following communication ports as a minimum:
one Ethernet communication module (unless otherwise noted). The CSI shall be
required to provide all communication modules as required for communication with
equipment connected to the PLC and for connection to the control system network.
D. The PLC power supply shall be sized to provide 25% spare capacity.
E. All PLC units shall be provided with battery backup. All exterior control panels shall
be provided with a battery back-up system that consists of a power supply / battery
charger and re-chargeable batteries. The use of an off the shelf UPS shall not be
considered acceptable.
F. All industrial Ethernet components shall be provided with removal configuration plugs
which allow for easy replacement and storage of configuration parameters without need
for addition programming software or cables.
2.7 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)
A. Manufacturer:
1. Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 6 1250
2. No equals
B. Specifications:
1. Screen: 12” TFT display
2. Display type: color (TFT)
3. Input type: touchscreen (no keypad)
4. Communications: Ethernet, Rs232
5. Power input: 120VAC
2.8 PANEL MOUNTED DEVICES
A. Selector Switches, Pushbuttons, and Indicating Lights
1. General:
a. Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicating lights shall be supplied by one
manufacturer and be of the same series or model type.
b. Type: Heavy duty with full guard, oil tight, 30.5mm, 120VAC, 10A continuous.
c. Provide legend plate for indication of each switch, pushbutton or light function
(e.g., "OPEN-CLOSED", "HAND-OFF-AUTO").
d. Mounting: Flush mounted on control panel front, unless otherwise noted.
e. NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-9
2. Selector Switches:
a. Type: Provide selector switches with number of positions as required to perform
intended functions as shown and specified.
b. Contacts:
1) Provide number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform in-
tended functions specified, but not less than one single pole, double throw
contact.
2) Type: Double break, silver contacts with movable contact blade providing
scrubbing action.
3) Rating: Compatible with AC or DC current with devices simultaneously
operated by the switch contacts, but not less than 10A resistive at 120 VAC
or DC continuous.
c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
3. Pushbuttons (Standard or Illuminated):
a. Type: Provide momentary lighted and/or unlighted, single and/or dual type
pushbuttons as required to perform intended functions specified and shown.
b. Contacts: Comply with the requirements specified for selector switches.
4. Indicating Lights:
a. Type: Compact, LED type.
b. Lamps: Six volt, long life (20,000 hours minimum).
c. Common, push to test circuitry shall be provided for each panel to
simultaneously test all indicating lights on the panel using a single pushbutton.
5. Button and Lens Colors:
a. Red for indication of closed, on, stopped.
b. Green for indication of open, off (ready), running.
c. Amber for indication of equipment malfunction, process trouble and alarms
(e.g., "HIGH LEVEL", "LOW LEVEL", etc.).
d. Blue for indication of electrical control power on.
6. Rotary Cam Switches:
a. Provide rotary cam switches with number of positions and poles as required to
perform the required signal switching function specified and shown.
b. Contacts:
1) Gold-flashed contacts housed in mechanical contact blocks with number
and arrangement of contacts as required to perform intended functions.
2) Contact Rating: Compatible with AC or DC through-put current of signals
and devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts, but not less
than 20 A at 600 VAC or 250 VDC continuous.
c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
7. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley 800T
b. Eaton Electrical
c. Cutler Hammer
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-10
B. Control Relay
1. Type: General purpose, octal plug-in type rated for continuous duty, DPDT.
2. Construction Features:
a. Coil Voltages: 24 VDC or 120 VAC, as required.
b. Contacts:
1) Silver cadmium oxide rated not less than 10A resistive at 120 VAC or 24
VDC continuous.
2) For switching low energy circuits (less than 200 mA) fine silver, gold
flashed contacts rated not less than 3A resistive at 120 VAC or 28 VDC
continuous shall be provided.
c. Relays to have clear plastic dust cover.
d. Relays to have pilot light to show energized coil.
e. Relays to be UL recognized.
3. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley 700-HA
b. IDEC
c. Or equal
C. Time Delay Relay
1. Type: Dial adjustable, plug-in type time delay relay providing delay-on-make,
delay on- break or interval operation.
2. Construction Features:
a. MOS digital circuit with transformer coupled power.
b. Switch selectable ranges as follows:
1) One second.
2) Ten seconds.
3) One minute.
4) Ten minutes.
5) One hour.
6) Ten hours.
c. Minimum Setting: Three percent of range, except 50 ms for one-second range.
d. Setting Knob Accuracy: Ten percent.
e. Contacts:
1) Type: DPDT.
2) Rating: 5 A resistive at 120 VAC, 5 A at 24 VDC.
f. Housing: Plug-in design with dust and moisture resistant molded plastic case.
g. Power Input: 120 VAC or 24 VDC as required.
h. Operating Temperature: 32 degrees F to 130 degrees F.
i. Unit shall have LED to show timing status.
j. Relays to be UL recognized.
3. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Automatic Timing and Controls Company.
b. IDEC.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-11
c. Or equal
D. Power Supplies
1. General: Single unit power supplies, located in control panels, remote terminal units
and field panels as required.
2. Single Unit Required Features:
a. Solid state circuitry
b. Sized for 1.5 times the application requirements
c. DIN Rail mounting
d. Input Power: 120 VAC ±10 percent, 60 Hz
e. Output Power: 24 VDC or as required
f. Line/Load Regulation: ±0.005%
g. Ripple: 0.25 mV RMS
h. Polarity: Floating output
i. Ambient Temperature: -4ºF to 160ºF
j. Response Time: <20μS
k. Overload Protection: Internal preset
l. Include mounting brackets, fuse, and mating connector for AC power plug
3. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Sola / Hevi-Duty
b. Or equal
E. Uninterruptible Power Supply
1. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be furnished to provide a reliable source
of uninterruptible power with no break in AC output power during a complete or
partial interruption of incoming line power. UPS shall include audio/visual alarms.
UPS shall be UL listed.
2. Rating: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.4KVA/1.0KW minimum to provide uninterrupted
conditioned power, fully loaded conditions for 4 hours minimum.
3. Description: On line dual track power conditioner and true (0ms transfer time)
uninterruptible power supply providing isolation, line regulation and conditioning,
using sealed 48 VDC maintenance free batteries and switch mode power supply for
uninterrupted power with 0.5 to 0.7 power factor and 2.7 to 3.5 crest factor.
4. Required Features:
a. Lighting and Surge Protection: Inherent 2000: One spike attenuation.
b. Regulation: One to three percent load regulation with less than 2pF effective
coupling capacitance for line to load.
c. Output Waveform: Computer grade sine wave with three percent maximum
single harmonic and five percent maximum total harmonic distortion.
d. Output Frequency: 60Hz ±0.5Hz.
e. Operating Temperature: 34ºF to 104ºF.
f. Relative Humidity: 5% to 90 % non-condensing.
g. Computer Interface: RS232 port for display of 22 meter functions and 15 alarm
functions.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-12
h. Input Protection: Independent battery charger fuse and DC fuses.
i. Output Protection: Inherently current limited ferro-resonant transformer.
j. Battery Charger: Two-step charger, 8A and 2A.
k. AC Input: 120VAC, 60Hz, single phase, +15%, -20%.
l. AC Output: 12 VAC, 60Hz, single phase, +3%, -3%.
5. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Liebert
b. Or equal
F. Digital Indicator
1. General: The digital indicator shall accept an analog input and convert it to scaled
numerical characters for digital display and also provide up to two alarm outputs.
2. Required Features:
a. Display Height: 0.56-inch.
b. Display Capacity: Four digits with decimal point position jumper selectable.
c. Display Type: Seven segment, red LED.
d. Accuracy: ± 0.05%.
e. Analog Input: 4 to 20mADC.
f. Excitation Output: 15VDC for powering transmitter.
g. Analog Output: Proportional 4 to 20mADC.
h. Alarm Output: Dual with two 2A relays.
i. Temperature Range: 32ºF to 140ºF
j. Power: 120VAC, + 10 to -15%, 5W.
k. Enclosure: NEMA 4 splash proof.
3. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Red Lion.
b. Or equal.
G. Analog Indicator
1. General: Indicator Unit shall be a signal monitoring instrument that provides
continuous monitoring of a process variable on a scaled vertical bar display.
Indicator shall match in appearance other panel mounted instruments.
2. Description: Indicator Unit shall display one process variable.
3. Required Features:
a. Input Signals: 1 to 5VDC (into 10 mega-ohm) or 4 to 20mADC (into 250 ohm
range resistor).
b. Power Required: 21 to 28VDC; nominal input current at 24VDC is 400mA.
c. Displays: One segmented gas-discharge or LED vertical bar display.
d. Display Accuracy: One percent of input span.
e. Scale Length: Approximately 3-inches.
f. Operating Influences:
1) Ambient Temperature: Maintains display accuracy ratings for temperature
change within normal operating conditions.
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-13
2) Supply Voltage: Maintains display accuracy ratings for supply voltage var-
iation between 21 and 28VDC.
3) Electromagnetic Interference (EMI): Maintains display accuracy ratings
when instrument is subjected to an electromagnetic field of up to ten
volts/meter (when rack-mounted in cabinet with door closed). Display sta-
tion must be installed in panel.
g. Operating Conditions:
1) Ambient Temperature: 41 to 122ºF.
2) Maximum Temperature Variation: 36ºF per hr.
3) Ambient Relative Humidity: 10% to 90% non-condensing.
h. Mounting: Display station installs in a nominal 1-inch by 6-inch panel cutout
and shall match in appearance other panel mounted instruments.
4. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Red Lion
b. Or equal
H. Elapsed Time Meter (Hour Meter)
1. General: Unit shall be a powered, non-resettable time indicator, with easy to read
analog figures.
2. Required Features:
a. Power: 120VAC, or 4 to 40VDC
b. Accuracy: Within one percent
c. Capacity: Up to 99,999.9 hours (automatic recycle at zero); one-tenth hour
resolution
d. Operating Temperature: -40ºF to 155ºF
e. Sealed against dirt and moisture
f. Tamperproof
g. Shock resistant
h. Panel mountable
i. Nameplate below display shall read "TOTAL HOURS"
3. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Danaher Industrial Controls Group
b. Eaton Electrical
c. Or equal
I. Circuit Breakers
1. Molded-case circuit breakers shall be of the same AIC rating as the panel or
MCC/Panel to which they are connected/fed from, and shall be required to
selectively coordinate above 0.1 seconds.
2. Miniature circuit breakers
a. UL 489 recognized
b. DIN rail mountable
c. Rating: 277/480VAC at 10kAIC
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-14
d. “D” curve trip characteristics
e. Cable in-cable out design
f. Products and Manufacturers:
1) Eaton WMZ line
2) Or equal
J. Fuses
1. General: Unless otherwise noted the fuse rating and type shall be determined based
on the equipment (which the fuse is protecting) manufacturer’s recommendations
for overcurrent protection.
2. General purpose fuses. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Ferraz Shawmut UL Power Fuse style
b. Or equal
3. Semiconductor fuses. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Ferraz Shawmut Amp Trap series fuses
b. Or equal
4. Fuse blocks/holders shall be UL-style fuse blocks manufactured by Ferraz
Shawmut or equal.
K. Power Distribution Blocks
1. Block-style distribution blocks shall be provided with polycarbonate safety covers
to provide dead front protection. The safety cover shall have a test prod hole for
testing purposes.
2. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Ferraz-Shawmut
b. Or equal
L. Electronic Horn
1. General: The horn shall be of the multi-tone electronic audible type.
2. Required Features:
a. Internal volume control
b. Field selection of up to 16 different tones
c. Power: 120 VAC or 24 VDC (provide power supply as required)
d. Operating Temperature: 32ºF to120ºF
e. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X
3. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Panalarm.
b. Or equal.
M. Ethernet Switches
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-15
1. Fiber-to-Ethernet media converters shall be provided based upon 10/100Mbps TX,
100 Base FX, 1300nm, (6) ports minimum (4 RJ-45 Ethernet and 2 Fiber-Optic),
Fiber-Optic connections via SFP fiber inserts with SC fiber termination connectors,
and unmanaged.
2. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Hirschmann RS20
b. Or equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work of the service personnel during
construction, testing, and acceptance of the work.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall receive final approval on all panel, enclosure, and
equipment layouts by the ENGINEER prior to fabrication or installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and devices for the work shall be installed in the locations shown on the
drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in compliance
with the requirements of these specifications.
B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of all equipment
in the proposed locations with all other trades performing work on the project that may
be affected.
C. Install equipment in conformance with NEC.
D. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor NEMA 4X panels on 4-inch concrete pad.
Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides. Lay grout after panel
sills have been securely fastened down.
E. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor NEMA 4X panels on a reinforced concrete
pedestal:
1. Minimum Thickness: Eight-inches with No. 4 steel reinforcing bars at 12-inches on
centers, each way.
2. Minimum Size: Twelve-inches larger than outer dimensions of base, all sides.
A. Install anchor bolts and anchor in accordance with Section 03 30 01 - Cast-In-Place
Concrete – Building and Site Flatwork.
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION
James J. Tatone, P.E.
BDI/PNS - REI
05/27/2020
111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-16
A. Include all changes and/or alterations in the control panels prior to final inspection and
acceptance by the OWNER.
B. Any changes and/or alterations in the Control Panels shall be reflected/updated in all
Control Panel Schematics prior to acceptance by the OWNER. This includes all
electronic copies delivered to the OWNER.
END OF SECTION 40 95 13
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 05 53 - 1
SECTION 46 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Labels.
5. Lockout devices.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in Wastewater Facilities
specified by this Section.
2. Section 40 05 53 – Identification for Process Piping
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for equipment
identification and schedule, including equipment number, location, function, and manufacturer's
name and model number.
D. Samples: Submit one nameplate, label and tag for each size used on Project.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
installation.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Qualifications Statement:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 05 53 - 2
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.
B. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.
C. Tools: Furnish special crimpers and other devices required for Owner to reinstall tags.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to Wakulla County standards.
B. Maintain 1 copy of each standard affecting the Work of this Section on-Site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years' documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Furnish nameplates according to equipment manufacturer recommendations.
2. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.
B. Description: Aluminum with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color.
2.2 TAGS
A. Metal Tags:
1. Description:
a. Aluminum or Stainless steel construction; stamped letters.
b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 1-1/2-inch square with finished edges.
B. Information Tags:
1. Description:
a. Clear plastic with printed CAUTION and message.
b. Minimum Tag Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inch.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 05 53 - 3
c. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
2. Tag Chart: Typewritten, letter-size list of applied tags and location, in anodized aluminum
frame.
2.3 STENCILS
A. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.
B. Description:
1. Clean-cut symbols.
2. Letter Height: 1-3/4 inch.
C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in
Wastewater Facilities.
2.4 LABELS
A. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.
B. Description:
1. Aluminum construction.
2. Minimum Size: 1.9 by 0.75 inch.
3. Adhesive backed, with printed identification.
2.5 LOCKOUT DEVICES
A. Lockout Hasps:
1. Description:
a. Anodized aluminum construction.
b. Furnish hasp with erasable label surface.
c. Minimum Size: 7-1/4 by 3 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.
B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 05 53 - 4
C. Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 96 36.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Identify equipment with metal nameplates.
B. Identify inline pumps and other small devices with tags.
C. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
D. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals
in Wastewater Facilities.
E. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
F. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive.
G. Labels:
1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
H. Install tags using corrosion-resistant chain.
END OF SECTION 46 05 53
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 1
SECTION 46 21 83 – SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The contractor will furnish One (1) In Tank Screw Screen System and controls.
Equipment shall be installed as shown on the plans, as specified herein, as recommended
by the supplier and in compliance with all local, state and federal codes and regulations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Screening units and motor controllers shall, as applicable, meet the requirements of the
following industry standards:
• AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute)
• ABMA (American Bearing Manufacturers Association)
• AGMA (American Gear Manufacturers Association)
• NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association)
• NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)
• ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
• WSC (American Welding Society Code)
• ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
• NEC (National Electrical Code)
• UL (Underwriters Laboratory Standards
1.3 SUBMITTALS
The following will be submitted for the spiral screw screen/compactor furnished under
this specification:
A. Certificate of Compliance or complete list of all deviations from the drawings and
specifications.
B. Complete installation and assembly drawings, showing the manufacturer’s
dimensions, weights, and loadings.
C. Detailed specifications and data covering materials used, parts, instrumentation
devices, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished will be
submitted for review.
D. Manufacturer’s installation instruction and certification.
E. Operation and maintenance manual.
F. Manufacturer’s warranty agreement.
G. Electrical requirements, schematic diagrams, and details of components included.
H. Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 2
A. In order to assure uniform quality, ease of maintenance and minimal parts storage, it is
the intent of these Specifications that all equipment called for under this Section will
be supplied by a single manufacturer.
B. Other than the named supplier, all manufacturers proposing equipment described
herein, will provide a detailed submittal package, which will consist, at a minimum, of
all information and details prescribed in Section 1.03 of this specification. All pre-
qualification submittals will be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to the
bid date.
C. If submitted equipment requires arrangement differing from that indicated on the
drawings or specified, prepare and submit for review complete structural, mechanical,
and electrical drawings and equipment lists showing all necessary changes and
embodying all special features of equipment proposed. Any changes are at no
additional compensation and the Contractor will be responsible for all engineering
costs of redesign by the Engineer, if necessary.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Equipment will be covered against manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship
during normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from date of start up as long as
periodic maintenance procedures are followed and performed. Items specifically not
covered by the one year warranty are labor and consumable wear parts as identified in the
O&M manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The manufacturer must meet the general intent of these specifications.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
• Peak Flow (MGD): 1.15
• Perforations (mm): 6
• Material of constructions: 304 stainless steel
• Power Supply: 460 v/3 p/60 hz
• Motor HP: no greater than 5.0
• Motor rating: TEFC-XP
• Control panel: NEMA 4X SS
2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Equipment provided shall be a fully automatic, self-cleaning screening unit(s) with a
semi-cylindrical, perforated plate media screen basket. Screening unit(s) will be
provided with an angle-of-inclination between 25o and 35o from horizontal.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 3
2. Each screening unit shall be provided with a fixed, semi-cylindrical screen basket,
concentric shaftless spiral screw conveyor, optional screenings washing and optional
screenings compaction zone with single motor drive system.
3. Materials of Construction: All wetted parts shall be constructed from stainless steel,
including the shaftless spiral. Bearings, electrical devices, motor and gear reducer
shall be of the manufacturer’s standard materials.
4. Shop Surface Preparation/Coating: All welds shall be cleaned and passivated to
remove weld spatter, slag and discoloration using glass bead blasting process.
Bearings, electrical devices, motor and gear reducer shall be provided with the
manufacturer’s standard coating system.
B. Tank Assembly
1. The tank shall be constructed from type stainless steel. The tank shall be designed to
withstand the hydrostatic load from the process flow through the unit and provide
support of the screenings basket area. The tank is supplied with footings for
anchoring the unit, and lifting lugs for installation. The tank shall be supplied with
flanged inlet and flanged outlet connection and lifting lugs.
2. The top of the tank shall be enclosed by type stainless steel cover, including a hinged
access door.
3. Screen cover shall have a safety limit switch installed to prevent the screen from
operating with the tank cover in the open position. Screen cover shall be supplied
with connections for mounting the ultrasonic level sensor and vent
C. Screen Basket
1. The screen basket shall be fabricated from type stainless steel perforated plate with a
minimum thickness of 3mm and designed and built to withstand the maximum
possible static hydraulic forces exerted on the screen basket by the liquid flow.
Structural and functional parts shall be sized to prevent deflections or vibrations that
may impair the screening, conveying and compacting operations.
2. The screen basket shall be of a semi-cylindrical shape with perforations around the
entire basket.
3. The screen basket shall be perforated plate with maximum openings of 6 mm.
4. The screen basket shall be cleaned by a nylon brushes attached to the screening
basket zone of the shaftless spiral screw.
D. Spiral Screw Assembly
1. The shaftless spiral screw assembly shall be fabricated of stainless steel with a
diameter of 11.4 inches.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 4
2. The shaftless spiral screw assembly shall be designed to clean the screening basket
and transport material up the conveyor tube to the discharge of the unit.
3. The shaftless spiral screw shall be provided with a SS backed, stitch welded nylon
continuous brush or a sectional nylon brush or optionally the shaftless spiral screw
shall be provided with an L-shaped brush holder with compression pins at 90 or 180
degree (depending on size) intervals to hold the brush in place.
4. At the compaction/dewatering zone, the shaftless spiral flights shall end and
transition to an integrated shafted dewatering section allowing for compaction of the
screenings. At the discharge point the material shall freely release out of the unit.
E. Screenings Transport Zone
1. The transport tube shall be fabricated from type stainless steel with a minimum
thickness of 3mm.
F. Screenings Compaction Zone Assembly
1. The compaction/dewatering zone housing shall be fabricated from type stainless steel
and shall consist of a open-top rectangular body with fully welded 0.16 inch thick
end plates. The lower end of the housing shall be fitted with a flexible hose
connected to the drain pipe stub to return water from the dewatering/compaction zone
back to the process stream.
2. The compaction/dewatering zone housing shall encase a cylindrical tube with a
perforation diameter of 3mm to 5mm on its underside to allow water to drain from
the pressed screenings. The compaction/dewatering zone tube shall be constructed of
stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 3mm and shall be of the same inner
diameter as the conveyor tube.
3. The compaction/dewatering zone housing shall be furnished with a latched, hinged
stainless steel access cover with a gasket. The access cover shall expose the entire
length and width of the compaction/dewatering and discharge area.
4. A spay bar shall be installed inside the compaction enclosure to keep the compaction
zone clear and rinse any residual solids from the drain area of the enclosure. Spray
bar wash system shall be furnished with control solenoid valve, stainless steel piping
and fittings, flexible reinforced hoses and 0 stainless steel or nylon spray nozzles.
G. Spray Wash System – A centralized washing system shall be provided to connect all
spray wash systems to a common service connection point. The piping manifold shall be
constructed from type stainless steel. Washwater solenoids and manual ball valves shall
be factory installed with the manifold assembly.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 5
H. Screen Mounting
1. A screen support structure shall be provided to adequately support the screen under
operating conditions. The support stand shall allow the screen to be pivoted out of the
tank for maintenance. The support stand shall be constructed from type stainless
steel.
I. Drive Unit
1. Drive unit shall be directly connected to the main drive shaft via the reducer’s hollow
shaft.
2. The gear reducer shall be bolted to the upper compaction/dewatering zone housing
end plate.
3. Gear reducer shall be a helical gear type. Provide a cast iron frame; design in
accordance with AGMA recommendations for Class II service.
4. The motor shall be TEFC-XP, no greater than 5.0 HP, 1800 RPM, 460 Volt, 3 phase,
60 Hz. The motor shall be NEMA design code B and be direct coupled to the
reducer.
5. The stub shaft shall extend from the gear reducer into the end of the transport tube.
Stub shaft shall be constructed of high strength alloy steel and shall have a protective
epoxy coating.
6. The spiral screw assembly shall bolted to the stub shaft via a flanged connection.
2.4 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND DEVICES
A. In addition to the drive motor, the equipment supplier shall furnish all electrical items
specifically called for in this specification section. The contractor shall supply all other
electrical items, and interconnecting wiring of proper size, including all conduit and
supports required to place the equipment into service.
1. Control Panel: A 460 volt primary control panel shall be provided in a NEMA 4X
SS enclosure with powder coated white finish suitable for wall mounting with the
following components to provide proper operation of the equipment:
a. Main disconnect with through door interlock handle.
b. Step down control transformer.
c. Branch circuit protection.
d. Drive motor starter - reversing.
e. Emergency stop pushbutton.
f. Screen HOA switch.
g. Screen FOR switch, spring return reverse to off.
h. Load monitor shall provide overload protection by sensing motor current
draw.
i. Run and Off indicating lights.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 6
j. Alarm light indicating over current, and starter overload.
k. Alarm reset pushbutton.
l. Programmable control relay to provide necessary control logic and
monitor equipment mounted electrical devices.
m. Run and alarm auxiliary contacts for use by the customer.
n. UL Label.
B. Solenoid Valves: As required shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.
C. Local Emergency Stop: If required provide a local emergency stop push button in a
NEMA 4X SS enclosure.
2.5 OPERATION, MONITORING, AND CONTROL
A. Screen Hand Operation: Screen to run continuously.
B. Screen Automatic Operation: Screen to cycle based on the level sensor or repeat cycle
timer. Provide provisions to prevent excessive starting and stopping of the unit. Cycle
timer shall be reset after each run initiated by the level sensor.
2.6 ANCHORAGE AND FASTENERS
A. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch diameter and made of
type 304 stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, and
washers required for the equipment.
B. Fasteners: All fasteners shall be type 304 stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall
furnish all fasteners required for the assembly of the equipment.
2.7 SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be provided for each screen unit.
1. One (1) set of spare brushes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. The mounting points of the channel shall be level and parallel and of proper size.
3.2 LIFTING AND MOVING EQUIPMENT
B. Lifting points shall be identified. A crane of sufficient capacity must be on site for
unloading the equipment from the truck and placing in the channel for installation.
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 7
3.3 INSTALLATION
C. The installation is the responsibility of the Contractor. Complete installation procedures
are included in the O&M manual shipped with the unit.
3.4 START UP/TRAINING/FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
D. The initial start-up will be performed by a manufacturer’s authorized representative. The
authorized representative will verify the proper operation and installation, and provide
training to the equipment operators. One (1) trip and two (2) days are allotted.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.5 Information on minor periodic adjustments and cleaning is contained in the Operating and
Maintenance Manual.
END OF SECTION 46 21 83
T. Keith Hill, P.E.
BDI/PNS
05/27/2020
K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 8
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
APPENDIX A
CSI SUBSTITUTION FORM
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
© Copyright 2013, CSI,
110 S. Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page ___ of ___ Form Version: September 2013
CSI Form 13.1A
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase) Project:
To:
Re:
Substitution Request Number:
From:
Date:
A/E Project Number:
Contract For:
Specification Title: Section: Page:
Description: Article/Paragraph:
Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone:
History: ☐ New product ☐ 1-4 years old ☐ 5-10 years old ☐ More than 10 years old
Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ☐ Point-by-point comparative data attached — REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation:
Project: Architect:
Address: Owner:
Date Installed:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ☐ No ☐ Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ☐ No ☐ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.
Supporting Data Attached: ☐Drawings ☐Product Data ☐ Samples ☐ Tests ☐ Reports ☐
© Copyright 2013, CSI,
110 S. Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page ___ of ___ Form Version: September 2013
CSI Form 13.1A
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase — Continued) The Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become
apparent are to be waived.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution.
• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:
Telephone: Attachments: ☐
A/E’s REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATION
☐ Approve Substitution - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. ☐ Approve Substitution as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. ☐ Reject Substitution - Use specified materials. ☐ Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.
Signed by: Date: OWNER'S REVIEW AND ACTION
☐ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Prepare Change
Order. ☐ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Prepare
Change Order. ☐ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.
Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ☐Contractor ☐Subcontractor ☐Supplier ☐Manufacturer ☐A/E